448
MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING ESSENTIALS Course Guide Version: RPTESS-901-Jan11-CG

MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING ESSENTIALS

Course Guide Version: RPTESS-901-Jan11-CG

Page 2: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

© 2000–2011 MicroStrategy Incorporated. All rights reserved.

This Course (course and course materials) and any Software are provided “as is” and without express or limited warranty of any kind by either MicroStrategy Incorporated (“MicroStrategy”) or anyone who has been involved in the creation, production, or distribution of the Course or Software, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the Course and Software is with you. Should the Course or Software prove defective, you (and not MicroStrategy or anyone else who has been involved with the creation, production, or distribution of the Course or Software) assume the entire cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction.

In no event will MicroStrategy or any other person involved with the creation, production, or distribution of the Course or Software be liable to you on account of any claim for damage, including any lost profits, lost savings, or other special, incidental, consequential, or exemplary damages, including but not limited to any damages assessed against or paid by you to any third party, arising from the use, inability to use, quality, or performance of such Course and Software, even if MicroStrategy or any such other person or entity has been advised of the possibility of such damages, or for the claim by any other party. In addition, MicroStrategy or any other person involved in the creation, production, or distribution of the Course and Software shall not be liable for any claim by you or any other party for damages arising from the use, inability to use, quality, or performance of such Course and Software, based upon principles of contract warranty, negligence, strict liability for the negligence of indemnity or contribution, the failure of any remedy to achieve its essential purpose, or otherwise.

The Course and the Software are copyrighted and all rights are reserved by MicroStrategy. MicroStrategy reserves the right to make periodic modifications to the Course or the Software without obligation to notify any person or entity of such revision. Copying, duplicating, selling, or otherwise distributing any part of the Course or Software without prior written consent of an authorized representative of MicroStrategy are prohibited.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights. It is acknowledged that the Course and Software were developed at private expense, that no part is public domain, and that the Course and Software are Commercial Computer Software and/or Commmercial Computer Software Documentation provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS under Federal Acquisition Regulations and agency supplements to them. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFAR 252.227-7013 et. seq. or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software—Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable. The Contractor is MicroStrategy, 1850 Towers Crescent Plaza, Vienna, Virginia 22182. Rights are reserved under copyright laws of the United States with respect to unpublished portions of the Software.

Trademark Information

MicroStrategy, MicroStrategy 6, MicroStrategy 7, MicroStrategy 7i, MicroStrategy 7i Evaluation Edition, MicroStrategy 7i Olap Services, MicroStrategy 8, MicroStrategy 9, MicroStrategy Distribution Services, MicroStrategy MultiSource Option, MicroStrategy Command Manager, MicroStrategy Enterprise Manager, MicroStrategy Object Manager, MicroStrategy Reporting Suite, MicroStrategy Power User, MicroStrategy Analyst, MicroStrategy Consumer, MicroStrategy Email Delivery, MicroStrategy BI Author, MicroStrategy BI Modeler, MicroStrategy Evaluation Edition, MicroStrategy Administrator, MicroStrategy Agent, MicroStrategy Architect, MicroStrategy BI Developer Kit, MicroStrategy Broadcast Server, MicroStrategy Broadcaster, MicroStrategy Broadcaster Server, MicroStrategy Business Intelligence Platform, MicroStrategy Consulting, MicroStrategy CRM Applications, MicroStrategy Customer Analyzer, MicroStrategy Desktop, MicroStrategy Desktop Analyst, MicroStrategy Desktop Designer, MicroStrategy eCRM 7, MicroStrategy Education, MicroStrategy eTrainer, MicroStrategy Executive, MicroStrategy Infocenter, MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, MicroStrategy Intelligence Server Universal Edition, MicroStrategy MDX Adapter, MicroStrategy Narrowcast Server, MicroStrategy Objects, MicroStrategy OLAP Provider, MicroStrategy SDK, MicroStrategy Support, MicroStrategy Telecaster, MicroStrategy Transactor, MicroStrategy Web, MicroStrategy Web Business Analyzer, MicroStrategy World, Application Development and Sophisticated Analysis, Best In Business Intelligence, Centralized Application Management, Information Like Water, Intelligence Through Every Phone, Intelligence To Every Decision Maker, Intelligent E-Business, Personalized Intelligence Portal, Query Tone, Rapid

Page 3: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Application Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence Platform Built For The Enterprise, The Platform For Intelligent E-Business, The Scalable Business Intelligence Platform Built For The Internet, Industrial-Strength Business Intelligence, Office Intelligence, MicroStrategy Office, MicroStrategy Report Services, MicroStrategy Web MMT, MicroStrategy Web Services, Pixel Perfect, Pixel-Perfect, MicroStrategy Mobile, MicroStrategy Integrity Manager and MicroStrategy Data Mining Services are all registered trademarks or trademarks of MicroStrategy Incorporated.

All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated. Specifications subject to change without notice. MicroStrategy is not responsible for errors or omissions. MicroStrategy makes no warranties or commitments concerning the availability of future products or versions that may be planned or under development.

Patent Information

This product is patented. One or more of the following patents may apply to the product sold herein: U.S. Patent Nos. 6,154,766, 6,173,310, 6,260,050, 6,263,051, 6,269,393, 6,279,033, 6,567,796, 6,587,547, 6,606,596, 6,658,093, 6,658,432, 6,662,195, 6,671,715, 6,691,100, 6,694,316, 6,697,808, 6,704,723, 6,741,980, 6,765,997, 6,768,788, 6,772,137, 6,788,768, 6,798,867, 6,801,910, 6,820,073, 6,829,334, 6,836,537, 6,850,603, 6,859,798, 6,873,693, 6,885,734, 6,940,953, 6,964,012, 6,977,992, 6,996,568, 6,996,569, 7,003,512, 7,010,518, 7,016,480, 7,020,251, 7,039,165, 7,082,422, 7,113,993, 7,181,417, 7,127,403, 7,174,349, 7,194,457, 7,197,461, 7,228,303, 7,260,577, 7,266,181, 7,272,212, 7,302,639, 7,324,942, 7,330,847, 7,340,040, 7,356,758, 7,356,840, 7,415,438, 7,428,302, 7,430,562, 7,440,898, 7,486,780, 7,509,671, 7,516,181, 7,559,048, 7,574,376, 7,617,201, 7,725,811, 7,801,967, 7,836,178, 7,861,161 and 7,861,253. Other patent applications are pending.

How to Contact Us

MicroStrategy Education Services1850 Towers Crescent Plaza

Vienna, VA 22182Phone: 877.232.7168

Fax: 703.848.8602E-mail: [email protected]

http://www.microstrategy.com/education

MicroStrategy Incorporated1850 Towers Crescent Plaza

Vienna, VA 22182Phone: 703.848.8600

Fax: 703.848.8610E-mail: [email protected]

http://www.microstrategy.com

Page 4: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence
Page 5: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 5

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Preface Course Description.................................................................... 11Who Should Take This Course.............................................. 12Follow-Up Courses ................................................................ 12Related Certifications............................................................. 12Course Objectives ................................................................. 13

About the Course Materials ......................................................... 14Content Descriptions ............................................................. 14Learning Objectives ............................................................... 14Lessons ................................................................................. 15Opportunities for Practice ...................................................... 15Typographical Standards....................................................... 15MicroStrategy Courses .......................................................... 18Core Courses......................................................................... 18

1. Introduction to MicroStrategy Business Intelligence

Lesson Description ................................................................... 19Lesson Objectives ................................................................. 20

Business Intelligence Architecture............................................... 21Source Systems (OLTP) ........................................................ 22Data Warehouse (OLAP) ....................................................... 23ETL Process .......................................................................... 24Metadata Database ............................................................... 25MicroStrategy Applications .................................................... 25

Lesson Summary......................................................................... 27

2. Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop

Lesson Description ................................................................... 29Lesson Objectives ................................................................. 30

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop......................................... 31

Page 6: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Table Of Contents MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

6 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Desktop........................................................... 32MicroStrategy Architect.......................................................... 36Administrative Functions........................................................ 38

Project Sources and Projects ...................................................... 39Connect to a Project Source.................................................. 40Administration Icon ................................................................ 42Project Icons .......................................................................... 43

The MicroStrategy Desktop Interface .......................................... 44

Basic Navigation .......................................................................... 47The MicroStrategy Desktop Menu Bar................................... 47The MicroStrategy Desktop Toolbar ...................................... 48

Creating and Saving Objects ....................................................... 50Creating Objects .................................................................... 50Saving Objects....................................................................... 52

Shortcuts to Objects .................................................................... 53Lesson Summary......................................................................... 55

3. Reports Lesson Description ................................................................... 57Lesson Objectives ................................................................. 58

What Is a Report?........................................................................ 59

Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports ....................................... 61The Report Editor .................................................................. 61Creating Reports.................................................................... 64Saving Reports ...................................................................... 71Running Reports .................................................................... 73Report Display Views............................................................. 74Report Details Properties....................................................... 75

Exercises: Reports....................................................................... 80Create a Report ..................................................................... 80Work with Design View .......................................................... 83Use the Template Editor ........................................................ 85Use an Existing Template and No Filtering Criteria ............... 87Extra Credit ............................................................................ 89

Lesson Summary......................................................................... 91

4. Report Manipulations Lesson Description ................................................................... 93Lesson Objectives ................................................................. 94

Part I - Data Manipulation ............................................................ 96

Drilling.......................................................................................... 97

Page 7: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Table Of Contents

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 7

What is Drilling? ..................................................................... 97Methods for Drilling ................................................................ 99

Page-by ..................................................................................... 106What Is Page-by? ................................................................ 106Methods for Creating Page-by Fields .................................. 108

Data Pivoting ............................................................................. 110Methods for Data Pivoting ................................................... 110

Subtotals.................................................................................... 112Subtotals by Position ........................................................... 113Subtotals Across Levels ...................................................... 114Subtotals Group By.............................................................. 116

Sorting ....................................................................................... 119Methods for Sorting ............................................................. 119

Outline Mode ............................................................................. 125Using Outline Mode ............................................................. 126

Printing....................................................................................... 129

Exporting and E-mailing Reports ............................................... 131Removing Metrics Columns ................................................. 132

Report Subscription in Desktop ................................................. 134Subscribing a Report to the History List............................... 134Subscribing a Report to Update Cache ............................... 136Subscribing a Report to a Mobile Device............................. 137

Adding Notes to Reports and Documents ................................. 139

Part II - Style Manipulation......................................................... 142

Formatting.................................................................................. 143Methods for Formatting........................................................ 143Autostyles ............................................................................ 146

Thresholds ................................................................................. 148

Banding...................................................................................... 155

Locking and Resizing Columns and Rows ................................ 158

Graph Properties ....................................................................... 161Display Data Labels ............................................................. 161Graph Title ........................................................................... 163Specify the Number of Categories and Series..................... 165Nested Labels ...................................................................... 167Graph Undo/Redo................................................................ 169

Exercises: Report Manipulations ............................................... 170Part I - Data Manipulation .................................................... 170Drilling and Page-By ............................................................ 170

Page 8: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Table Of Contents MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

8 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Pivoting and Sorting............................................................. 175Totals and Outline Mode...................................................... 178Exporting Reports ................................................................ 184E-mailing Reports ................................................................ 186Part II - Style Manipulation................................................... 188Formatting and Autostyles ................................................... 188Thresholds ........................................................................... 192Locking\Resizing Columns and Rows.................................. 197Bar Graph ............................................................................ 201Graph with Gauges.............................................................. 207

Lesson Summary....................................................................... 211

5. Filters Lesson Description ................................................................. 213Lesson Objectives ............................................................... 214

What Is a Filter?......................................................................... 215

Creating and Saving Report Filters............................................ 219The Filter Editor ................................................................... 219Creating a Simple Filter ....................................................... 220Saving a Filter ...................................................................... 221

Types of Report Filters .............................................................. 222Attribute Qualification........................................................... 222Set Qualification................................................................... 226Shortcut to a Report (Report As Filter) ................................ 227Shortcut to a Filter (Filter Qualification) ............................... 229

Set Operators ............................................................................ 230

Exercises: Filters ....................................................................... 235Creating a Filter ................................................................... 235Creating Another Filter......................................................... 236Qualifying on a Metric .......................................................... 238Combining Two Filters in a Report....................................... 241

Lesson Summary:...................................................................... 243

6. Metrics Lesson Description ................................................................. 245Lesson Objectives ............................................................... 246

What Is a Fact?.......................................................................... 247

What Is a Metric?....................................................................... 249

Types of Metrics ........................................................................ 253Simple Metrics ..................................................................... 253Nested Metrics ..................................................................... 254Compound Metrics............................................................... 255

Page 9: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Table Of Contents

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 9

Metric Creation .......................................................................... 257Metric Editor......................................................................... 257Metric Components.............................................................. 260Creating a Simple Metric...................................................... 261Saving a Metric .................................................................... 263

Metric Formatting....................................................................... 264Metric Value and Header Formatting................................... 264Subtotals/Aggregation Tab .................................................. 265

Exercises: Metrics...................................................................... 272Create a Simple Metric—Cost ............................................. 272Create a Simple Metric—Revenue ...................................... 274Use the New Metrics in a Report ......................................... 275Create a Compound Metric—Profit Margin.......................... 277Use Profit Margin in a Report............................................... 278Display Subtotals ................................................................. 282

Lesson Summary....................................................................... 286

7. MicroStrategy OLAP Services

Lesson Description ................................................................. 289Lesson Objectives ............................................................... 290

Introduction to OLAP Services................................................... 291

Report Objects........................................................................... 292Methods for Adding Report Objects..................................... 293Methods for Removing Report Objects................................ 294

View Filters ................................................................................ 296

Derived Metrics.......................................................................... 299

Exercises: MicroStrategy OLAP Services.................................. 302Using the Report Objects Window to Add Attributes ........... 302Using View Filters ................................................................ 305Create and Format a Derived Metric—Growth .................... 308

Lesson Summary....................................................................... 313

8. Prompts and Searches

Lesson Description ................................................................. 315Lesson Objectives ............................................................... 316

What Is a Prompt? ..................................................................... 317Creating Prompts ................................................................. 318

Filter Definition Prompts ............................................................ 323Creating Filter Definition Prompts ........................................ 323Using Filter Definition Prompts in a Report.......................... 337

Object Prompts .......................................................................... 338

Page 10: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Table Of Contents MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

10 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Creating Object Prompts...................................................... 339Using Object Prompts in a Report ....................................... 341

Value Prompts ........................................................................... 344Creating a Value Prompt ..................................................... 345Using Value Prompts in a Report......................................... 347

Creating Local Prompts in the Report Editor ............................. 349

Re-prompting Inside Reports..................................................... 351

Saving Reports with Prompts .................................................... 352Save and Reuse Prompt Answers ....................................... 353

What Is a Search Object?.......................................................... 358The Search for Objects Editor.............................................. 358Saving Searches.................................................................. 361Search-based Prompts ........................................................ 361

Exercises: Prompts and Searches............................................. 362Create Filter Definition Prompts........................................... 362Create Object Prompts ........................................................ 367Create a Value Prompt ........................................................ 374Search for Report Elements................................................. 377

Lesson Summary....................................................................... 381

A. MicroStrategy Tutorial The MicroStrategy Tutorial Data Model ..................................... 384Geography Hierarchy........................................................... 386Customers Hierarchy ........................................................... 387Time Hierarchy..................................................................... 388Products Hierarchy .............................................................. 389

The MicroStrategy Tutorial Schema .......................................... 389Geography Schema............................................................. 393Customers Schema ............................................................. 394Time Schema....................................................................... 395Products Schema ................................................................ 396Fact Tables Schema............................................................ 397

MicroStrategy Glossary .......................................................... 399

Index ......................................................................................... 443

Page 11: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 11

PREFACE

Course Description

This 2-day course provides an overview of reporting, using MicroStrategy Desktop. The topics covered in this course include:

• Navigating the MicroStrategy Desktop interface

• Building and manipulating reports, templates, basic filters, basic metrics, prompts, and searches using MicroStrategy Desktop

• Using the functionality of MicroStrategy OLAP Services and understanding the benefits it provides

Page 12: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Preface MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

12 Who Should Take This Course © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Who Should Take This Course

This course is designed for:

• Project Architects

• Desktop Developers

• Administrators

• SDK Developers

Follow-Up Courses

After taking this course, you might consider taking the following courses:

• MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting

• MicroStrategy Architect: Project Design Essentials

• MicroStrategy Report Services: Document Essentials

Related Certifications

To validate your proficiency in the content of this course, you might consider taking the following certifications:

• Certified Project Designer

• Certified Report Developer

• Certified Platform Administrator

Page 13: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Preface

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Course Objectives 13

Course Objectives

After completing this course, you will be able to:

• Describe the MicroStrategy business intelligence architecture. (Page 20)

• Describe the components of MicroStrategy Desktop, navigate the main interface, and access project sources and projects. (Page 30)

• Define the components that comprise a report and create simple reports using MicroStrategy Desktop. (Page 58)

• Define the different types of report manipulations available and perform these report manipulations using MicroStrategy Desktop. (Page 94)

• Define the different types of report filters available in MicroStrategy Desktop and create each type using the Filter Editor. (Page 214)

• Define the different types of metrics, and create them using the Metric Editor in MicroStrategy Desktop. (Page 246)

• Describe the features provided by MicroStrategy OLAP Services, including report objects, view filters, and derived metrics. Use the Report Objects window, and create view filters and derived metrics in reports. (Page 290)

• Define the different types of prompts, and explain how you can use search objects inside prompts. Create prompts and searches in MicroStrategy Desktop. (Page 316)

Page 14: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Preface MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

14 About the Course Materials © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

About the Course Materials

This course is organized into lessons and reference appendices. Each lesson focuses on major concepts and skills that help you to better understand MicroStrategy products and use them to implement MicroStrategy projects. The appendices provide you with supplemental information to enhance your knowledge of MicroStrategy products.

Content Descriptions

Each major section of this course begins with a Description heading. The Description introduces you to the content contained in that section.

Learning Objectives

Learning objectives enable you to focus on the key knowledge and skills you should obtain by successfully completing this course. Objectives are provided for you at the following three levels:

• Course—You will achieve these overall objectives by successfully completing all the lessons in this course. The Course Objectives heading in this Preface contains the list of course objectives.

• Lesson—You will achieve these main objectives by successfully completing all the topics in the lesson. You can find the primary lesson objectives directly under the Lesson Objectives heading at the beginning of each lesson.

• Main Topic—You will achieve this secondary objective by successfully completing the main topic. The topic objective is stated at the beginning of the topic text. You can find a list of all the topic objectives in each lesson under the Lesson Objectives heading at the beginning of each lesson.

Page 15: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Preface

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. About the Course Materials 15

Lessons

Each lesson sequentially presents concepts and guides you with step-by-step procedures. Illustrations, screen examples, bulleted text, notes, and definition tables help you to achieve the learning objectives.

Opportunities for Practice

A Workshop is a reinforcement and assessment activity that follows two or more lessons. Because a Workshop covers content and applied skills presented in several lessons, it is a separate section on the level of a lesson.

The following sections within lessons provide you with opportunities to reinforce important concepts, practice new product and project skills, and monitor your own progress in achieving the lesson and course objectives:

• Review

• Case Study

• Business Scenario

• Exercises

Typographical Standards

The following sections explain the font style changes, icons, and different types of notes that you see in this course.

Actions

References to screen elements and keys that are the focus of actions are in bold Arial font style. The following example shows this style:

Click Select Warehouse.

Page 16: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Preface MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

16 About the Course Materials © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Code

References to code, formulas, or calculations within paragraphs are formatted in regular Courier.New font style. The following example shows this style:

Sum(Sales)/Number of Months

Data Entry

References to literal data you must type in an exercise or procedure are in bold Arial font style. References to data you type that could vary from user to user or system to system are in bold italic Arial font style. The following example shows this style:

Type copy c:\filename d:\foldername\filename.

Keyboard Keys

References to a keyboard key or shortcut keys are in uppercase letters in bold Arial font style. The following example shows this style:

Press CTRL+B.

New Terms

New terms to note are in regular italic font style. These terms are defined when they are first encountered in the course. The following example shows this style:

The aggregation level is the level of calculation for the metric.

Notes and Warnings

A note icon indicates helpful information.

Page 17: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Preface

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. About the Course Materials 17

A warning icon calls your attention to very important information that you should read before continuing the course.

Heading Icons

The following heading icons are used to indicate specific practice and review sections:

— Precedes a Review section

— Precedes a Case Study

— Precedes a Business Scenario

— Precedes Exercises

Page 18: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Preface MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

18 About the Course Materials © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Courses

Core Courses

• Implementing MicroStrategy: Development and Deployment

• MicroStrategy Architect: Project Design Essentials

• MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting

• MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

• MicroStrategy Report Services: Document Essentials

• MicroStrategy Report Services: Dynamic Dashboards

• MicroStrategy Web for Professionals

• MicroStrategy Web for Reporters and Analysts

*All courses are subject to change. Please visit the MicroStrategy Web site for thelatest education offerings.

Page 19: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 19

1INTRODUCTION TO MICROSTRATEGY BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE

Lesson Description

This lesson introduces you to the basic components of a business intelligence architecture using MicroStrategy:

• Source systems

• Data warehouse

• ETL process

• Metadata database

• MicroStrategy applications

If you are already familiar with business intelligence systems, this lesson will serve as a good refresher and will help you link the terminology and concepts you already understand to a MicroStrategy environment.

Page 20: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Business Intelligence MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials1

20 Lesson Objectives © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

Describe the MicroStrategy business intelligence architecture.

After completing the topics in this lesson, you will be able to:

• List and define the components of a business intelligence architecture using MicroStrategy. (Page 21)

Page 21: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Business Intelligence 1

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Business Intelligence Architecture 21

Business Intelligence Architecture

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

List and define the components of a business intelligence architecture using MicroStrategy.

Business intelligence systems facilitate an ever-growing variety of applications that begin with sophisticated analysis of atomic-level data and range to proactive information delivery to system subscribers. The modern market place requires today’s business to be capable of analyzing itself at every level, on demand. It also requires the delivery of relevant and timely information to the right people at the right time. Finally, it requires that businesses have very close and individualized contact with their customers.

A business intelligence architecture using MicroStrategy is shown in the following diagram:

MicroStrategy Business Intelligence Architecture

Page 22: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Business Intelligence MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials1

22 Business Intelligence Architecture © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

This architecture has the following components:

• Source systems

• Data warehouse

• ETL process

• Metadata database

• MicroStrategy applications

Source Systems (OLTP)

Source systems are typically databases or mainframes that store transaction processing data. As such, they are an OnLine Transaction Processing System (OLTP). Transaction processing involves simple recording of transactions like sales, inventory, withdrawals, deposits, and so forth.

The data in source systems have the following characteristics:

• Data access is read/write (numerous selects, inserts, updates, and deletes).

• Data is aligned by application (business activities and workflow).

• Data formats are not necessarily uniform across different source systems.

• Data history is typically limited to recent or current data.

A bank is one example of a business with many different types of source systems. The average bank offers their customers a variety of services and, therefore, needs these different types of source systems to support their services, each of which has a different workflow.

For example, consider the Automated Teller Machine (ATM) and the bank teller. At an ATM, you can withdraw or deposit money as well as check your account balance. However, if you need a money order, you have to go inside and speak with a bank teller. The bank has different operational systems, each designed to perform tasks that are specific to the service.

Page 23: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Business Intelligence 1

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Business Intelligence Architecture 23

To take our example further, if a bank wanted to see a unified view of a particular customer—such as a customer’s ATM activity, loan status, account balances, money market account information, and so forth—all of the customer’s information from each of the different source systems would have to be collected. After this data is collected, it is stored in a centralized data warehouse.

Data Warehouse (OLAP)

A well-designed and robust data warehouse lies at the heart of the business intelligence system and enables its users to leverage the competitive advantage that business intelligence provides. A data warehouse is an example of an OnLine Analytical Processing System (OLAP).

While source systems are designed and optimized for transaction processing, data warehouses are designed and optimized for analytical processing. Analytical processing involves manipulating transaction records to calculate sales trends, growth patterns, percent to total contributions, trend reporting, profit analysis, and so forth.

The data in a data warehouse have the following characteristics:

• Data access is typically read-only (In SQL, mostly selects are used. Generally very few inserts, updates, or deletes are used).

• Data is aligned by business subjects.

• Data formats are uniformly integrated.

• Data history extends long term, usually 2 to 5 years.

A data warehouse is populated with data from the existing operational systems with an ETL process.

Page 24: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Business Intelligence MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials1

24 Business Intelligence Architecture © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Summary of Differences - OLTP vs. OLAP

The following table summarizes the differences between OLTP and OLAP systems:

ETL Process

The extraction, transformation, and loading (ETL) process contains information that facilitates the transfer of the data from the source systems to the data warehouse.

Specifically, the ETL process does the following:

• Stores information about the source system structure and content

• Stores information about the data warehouse structure and content

• Correlates source system structure and content to that of the data warehouse

• Provides information to the data extraction tools that physically execute the transfer of data from the source systems to the data warehouse

OLTP vs. OLAP Differences

OLTP OLAP

Organization By workflow

per application

By dimension and business subject

Data Retention Short term

(2-6 months)

Long term

(2-5 years)

Data Integration Minimal or none High, as part of ETL process

Data Storage Gigabytes Terabytes

Use Real time

Write & update

Evenly distributed usage

Transactional data

Batch load

Reporting, read-only

Spiked usage (based on time of warehouse loads)

Page 25: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Business Intelligence 1

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Business Intelligence Architecture 25

Metadata Database

The metadata database contains information that facilitates the retrieval of data from the data warehouse when using MicroStrategy applications. It stores MicroStrategy object definitions and information about the data warehouse in a proprietary format and maps MicroStrategy objects to the data warehouse structures and content.

MicroStrategy applications use the metadata database to translate user requests into SQL queries and to translate the results of those SQL queries back into MicroStrategy objects, like reports and documents.

The metadata also stores the definitions of all objects created with MicroStrategy Desktop (for example, templates, reports, metrics, facts, and so forth). The metadata enables the sharing of objects across MicroStrategy applications by providing a central repository for all object definitions. It is even used by MicroStrategy Intelligence Server to evaluate the most efficient data retrieval scenario to guarantee optimal query performance.

MicroStrategy Applications

The MicroStrategy applications allow you to interact with the business intelligence system. They allow you to logically organize data hierarchically to quickly and easily create, calculate, and analyze complex data relationships. They also provide the ability to look at data from many different perspectives.

A variety of grid and graph formats are available for superior report presentation. You can even build documents, which enable you to combine multiple reports with text and graphics.

In addition, you can use the MicroStrategy Software Developers Kit (SDK) to customize the interface that users see and the functionality available to them.

Page 26: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Business Intelligence MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials1

26 Business Intelligence Architecture © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

In previous versions of MicroStrategy, the objects in a standard report had to come from a single data source. MultiSource Option is a new add-on component to Intelligence Server that removes this limitation. It enables you to define a single project schema that uses multiple data sources. As a result, you can now create a standard report that executes SQL against multiple data sources.

For more information on MultiSource Option, refer to the MicroStrategy Architect: Project Design Essentials course.

Page 27: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Business Intelligence 1

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Lesson Summary 27

Lesson Summary

In this lesson, you learned:

• A business intelligence architecture using MicroStrategy has the following components: source systems, data warehouse, ETL process, metadata database, and MicroStrategy applications.

• Source systems or OnLine Transaction Processing Systems (OLTP) are typically databases or mainframes that store transaction processing data. This type of system involves simple recording of transactions like sales, inventory, withdrawals, deposits, and so forth.

• Data warehouses or OnLine Analytical Processing Systems (OLAP) are designed and optimized for analytical processing. This type of system involves manipulating transaction records to calculate sales trends, growth patterns, percent to total contributions, trend reporting, profit analysis, and so forth.

• The extraction, transformation, and loading (ETL) process contains information that facilitates the transfer of the data from the source systems to the data warehouse.

• The metadata database contains information that facilitates the retrieval of data from the data warehouse when using MicroStrategy applications. It stores MicroStrategy object definitions and information about the data warehouse in a proprietary format and maps MicroStrategy objects to the data warehouse structures and content.

• The MicroStrategy applications allow you to interact with the business intelligence system. They allow you to logically organize data hierarchically to quickly and easily create, calculate, and analyze complex data relationships. They also provide the ability to look at data from many different perspectives.

Page 28: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Business Intelligence MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials1

28 Lesson Summary © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Page 29: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 29

2INTRODUCTION TO MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP

Lesson Description

This lesson introduces you to the MicroStrategy Desktop application. It gives you an opportunity to familiarize yourself with the interface and learn some of the basic functionality.

In addition to navigating the interface, this lesson introduces you to project sources and projects, two of the highest-level objects in the MicroStrategy environment.

Page 30: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials2

30 Lesson Objectives © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

Describe the components of MicroStrategy Desktop, navigate the main interface, and access project sources and projects.

After completing the topics in this lesson, you will be able to:

• List and define the components of MicroStrategy Desktop. (Page 31)

• Connect to a project source and access the projects within it. List and define the components of a project. (Page 39)

• Navigate the MicroStrategy Desktop interface. (Page 44)

• Navigate and use the MicroStrategy Desktop menus and toolbars. (Page 47)

• List the different ways to create and save new objects. (Page 50)

• Create shortcuts to MicroStrategy objects. (Page 53)

Page 31: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 2

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 31

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

List and define the components of MicroStrategy Desktop.

MicroStrategy Desktop enables you to design, create, and maintain an entire business intelligence system from a single interface by integrating the following tools:

• MicroStrategy Desktop (Designer or Analyst)

• MicroStrategy Architect

• Administrative functions, including tools to manage users, implement security, and configure and maintain MicroStrategy Intelligence Server

This course teaches you the fundamental skills required to use MicroStrategy Desktop Designer or Desktop Analyst. Each of the components of MicroStrategy Desktop is briefly described in this lesson.

For more information about MicroStrategy Architect, refer to the MicroStrategy Architect: Project Design Essentials course. For more information about administrative functions for MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, refer to the System Administration Guide product manual.

Page 32: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials2

32 Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Desktop

MicroStrategy Desktop is the next-generation business intelligence environment designed to meet today’s sophisticated business intelligence requirements. It brings integrated querying and reporting, powerful collaborative analytics, and investigative workflow to every desktop.

Complete Business Intelligence Console

Powerful analytical capabilities give MicroStrategy Desktop the versatility to be used for rapid application development or sophisticated report navigation. You can design, create, and maintain an entire business intelligence system through a single interface due to its tight integration with MicroStrategy Architect. Rich analytics can be delivered to every desktop, giving you the ability to create advanced ad hoc queries and customized reporting.

Delivering the Enterprise Mandate

MicroStrategy Desktop is an integral component of a powerful business intelligence system that goes well beyond departmental and enterprise querying and reporting. Employees, strategic business partners, outside vendors, corporate customers, and other individuals all have the potential to access and analyze information from the data warehouse at the level of detail required for them to make informed business decisions.

Intuitive Reporting

MicroStrategy Desktop delivers the reporting sophistication required by even the most demanding workers—providing an integrated solution for users of all skill levels across the organization. Exceptional formatting, totaling, and printing abilities make it easy to create attractive reports. You can also create documents for formatting, displaying, and distributing multiple reports along with text, hyperlinks, images, tables, and so forth.

Page 33: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 2

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 33

Advanced Analysis

MicroStrategy Desktop is the only business intelligence application in the market engineered to support the full requirements of very large databases without any complex coding. It makes use of a wide variety of advanced mathematical, statistical, and financial calculations and sophisticated set analysis for the broadest analytic abilities available. MicroStrategy Desktop includes over 200 predefined functions. You can even create your own functions and integrate them into the application.

Desktop Versions

MicroStrategy Desktop is available in two versions:

• Desktop Analyst—Simplified version that provides interactive slice and dice capabilities to users

• Desktop Designer—Full-featured version that enables report developers to design complex and sophisticated reports and documents.

The following is a comprehensive list of the features available in each version:

MicroStrategy Desktop Version Comparison

MicroStrategy Desktop FeaturesDesktop Analyst

Desktop Designer

Create and define derived metrics*

Use report objects window*

Use view filter editor*

Execute document**

Define object alias

Change user preference

Choose attribute form display

Page 34: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials2

34 Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Configure toolbars

Drill and link

Modify report subtotals

Modify sorting

Pivot report

Re-execute report against warehouse

Save custom autostyle

Send to email

Use data explorer

Use desktop

Use grid options

Use history list

Use report data options

Use report editor

Use search editor

View SQL

Drill within Intelligent Cube

Add notes

Create application objects

Create new folder

Create shortcut

Edit notes

Save personal prompt answer

Schedule request

MicroStrategy Desktop Version Comparison

MicroStrategy Desktop FeaturesDesktop Analyst

Desktop Designer

Page 35: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 2

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 35

Use server cache

Use translation editor

View notes

Define and publish Intelligent Cube*

Use Intelligent Cube Editor*

Save derived elements*

Create HTML container**

Use document editor**

Use bulk export editor***

Define freeform SQL, MDX, and query builder reports

Format graph

Use object browser

Use consolidation editor

Use custom group editor

Use data mart editor

Use filter editor

Use find and replace dialog

Use HTML document editor

Use link editor

Use metric editor

Use project documentation

Use prompt editor

Use subtotal editor

Use template editor

MicroStrategy Desktop Version Comparison

MicroStrategy Desktop FeaturesDesktop Analyst

Desktop Designer

Page 36: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials2

36 Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategy Architect

MicroStrategy Architect is the innovative development environment designed to meet today’s sophisticated business intelligence requirements. Unique techniques of mapping the business model to the underlying data structures make MicroStrategy Architect the most flexible tool in the industry.

Flexible Application Design

MicroStrategy Architect is the only tool in the industry that can create business intelligence applications against terabyte-sized data warehouses based on any industry business model, such as finance, banking, retail, or pharmaceuticals. Through a user-friendly interface, you can create a rich abstraction layer for a relational database. MicroStrategy Architect also enables you to update the metadata, so changes are immediately and transparently implemented for all users.

Use thresholds editor

Use VLDB property editor

View ETL Information

* Requires MicroStrategy OLAP Services

** Requires MicroStrategy Report Services

*** Requires MicroStrategy Distribution Services

MicroStrategy Desktop Version Comparison

MicroStrategy Desktop FeaturesDesktop Analyst

Desktop Designer

Page 37: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 2

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 37

Make Data Accessible

Without an intelligent layer between the database and the data consumer, it is difficult to provide insight to a large user community. MicroStrategy Architect translates operational data into familiar terms through a rich abstraction layer. This enables you to navigate through your data quickly using familiar business terms. MicroStrategy metadata provides ultimate flexibility by operating with any relational database. Support for a wide range of warehouse schemas ensures that your MicroStrategy implementation will meet any analysis requirement.

Simplified, Rapid Development

MicroStrategy Architect’s convenient database reference utility lets you view column names and data types for any table in the data warehouse and speeds application development by evaluating definitions in the logical model. Advanced data models are simplified using the flexible schema definitions of MicroStrategy Architect. You can use single columns, compound keys, or user-defined expressions to define your schema objects.

Reduced System Maintenance

MicroStrategy Architect enables you to update the centralized metadata, thereby simplifying system maintenance. Changes are immediately and transparently implemented for all users, eliminating unneeded complexity. MicroStrategy Architect also facilitates change management by insulating business intelligence applications from any changes in the data warehouse. This lowers system maintenance and reduces operational costs.

Page 38: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials2

38 Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Administrative Functions

Most of the administrative functionality for the business intelligence system is found in the MicroStrategy Desktop interface.

User Management

MicroStrategy Desktop enables easy maintenance of users and user groups. A host of powerful user and object management features enables you to update access for current users, remove old users from the system, and copy existing user profiles to new user accounts.

Comprehensive Security Model

In any business intelligence solution, system security is of paramount importance. Users with administrative privileges can create and maintain the comprehensive security profiles required by today’s business intelligence applications. Access to application functionality, MicroStrategy projects, all MicroStrategy objects, and database rows and columns is controlled using MicroStrategy security privileges, roles, access control lists, and security filters.

Intelligence Server Administration

Through the MicroStrategy Desktop interface, users with administrative privileges can change many of the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server parameters. The MicroStrategy Administrator can configure settings such as maximum report length, maximum user idle time, and report prioritization.

Page 39: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 2

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Project Sources and Projects 39

Project Sources and Projects

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Connect to a project source and access the projects within it. List and define the components of a project.

To start MicroStrategy Desktop:

1 On the Microsoft Windows® Start menu, point to Programs, point to MicroStrategy, point to Desktop, and select Desktop.

By default, MicroStrategy Desktop will prompt you for login credentials for the last project source to which you were connected.

2 If prompted, supply a valid login ID and password.

3 Click OK.

This action will connect you to a MicroStrategy project source.

Page 40: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials2

40 Project Sources and Projects © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Connect to a Project Source

The highest-level icon in the folder list of MicroStrategy Desktop is the project source. Project sources are the highest-level objects in the MicroStrategy environment. A project source represents a connection to a metadata database or a MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. Through a project source you can create, manipulate, and administer MicroStrategy projects. The following illustration shows the relationship between a project source, the metadata database, and MicroStrategy projects:

Relationship Between Project Source and Projects

The illustration above depicts a direct project source, often referred to as a 2-tier project source. The first tier is MicroStrategy Desktop, and the second tier is the metadata database. This type of project source points directly to a MicroStrategy metadata database. The icon representing direct, 2-tier project sources looks like the following:

2-tier Project Source

Page 41: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 2

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Project Sources and Projects 41

Another type of project source is known as a server project source, often referred to as a 3-tier project source. The first tier is MicroStrategy Desktop, the second tier is MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, and the third tier is the metadata database. This type of project source points to a MicroStrategy Intelligence Server that is, in turn, connected to a MicroStrategy metadata database. The icon representing a server, 3-tier project source looks like the following:

3-tier Project Source

To connect to a project source:

1 In the Folder List, expand a project source.

2 In the Login window, type a valid login id and password.

3 Click OK.

There are two types of icons under the project source:

• The Administration icon provides access to all of the administrative functions for the particular project source.

Administration

• All other icons are project icons that represent the MicroStrategy projects stored in the metadata to which the project source is connected.

Project

Page 42: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials2

42 Project Sources and Projects © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Administration Icon

The Administration icon provides access to all of the administrative functions for a project source.

By default, only users with administrative privileges can see the Administration icon.

Without MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, you are limited to the following administration tools:

• System Monitors—Enable you to access only the Change Journaling Transactions monitor.

For more information on change journaling, refer to the System Administration Guide product manual.

• Configuration Managers—Enable you to access several manages where you create configuration objects such as database instances, schedules, events, security roles, and languages.

• Delivery Managers—Enable you to access the managers to create and manage transmitters and devices.

• User Manager—Enable you to create and manage users and user groups.

With MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, you get many additional administrative tools that enable you to control and monitor every aspect of the MicroStrategy environment.

For more information on administration functionality, refer to the System Administration Guide product manual.

Page 43: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 2

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Project Sources and Projects 43

Project Icons

A project is the intersection of a data warehouse, a metadata database, and a user community. It contains objects such as reports, filters, templates, and metrics.

To see the contents of a project:

1 Expand the project icon.

The project opens so you can view its contents.

By default, every project has the following folder structure:

If the Data Explorer does not appear in the Folder List, in Desktop, on the Tools menu, select Desktop Preferences. In the Categories list, below the Desktop category, select General. In the Desktop - General pane, under Data Explorer, select the Show the Data Explorer in the desktop check box and click OK. The Data Explorer should now appear in the Folder List.

Default Project Folders

Folder Description

History You use this folder to retrieve scheduled reports. This folder is only available if you are using MicroStrategy Intelligence Server.

My Personal Objects

You use these folders to store objects you create, that are only visible to you. You can always create additional subfolders here.

Public Objects

This folder contains objects that can be viewed by all users, depending on their permissions and privileges. The Public Objects folder contains numerous subfolders that are organized by object type.

Schema Objects

This folder contains objects that represent the business data model such as facts, attributes, and hierarchies.

Data Explorer

This browsing tool contains hierarchies that enable you to navigate the warehouse data and relationships for the project.

Page 44: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials2

44 The MicroStrategy Desktop Interface © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

The MicroStrategy Desktop Interface

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Navigate the MicroStrategy Desktop interface.

In the MicroStrategy Desktop interface, there are three main areas: the Folder List, the Object Viewer, and the Shortcut Bar.

Folder List

By default, the Folder List is the middle pane in the MicroStrategy Desktop interface. It shows all of the project sources, projects, application and schema object folders, as well as the administrative functions for the business intelligence system.

Most of these objects are described later in this lesson.

The Folder List may not automatically display when you initially log in to MicroStrategy Desktop.

To show the Folder List:

1 On the View menu, select Folder List.

Object Viewer

The right pane of the MicroStrategy Desktop interface is called the Object Viewer. Much like Microsoft Windows Explorer, you navigate through the folder structure in the Folder List, and the objects contained in the folders are displayed in the Object Viewer.

Page 45: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 2

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. The MicroStrategy Desktop Interface 45

Shortcut Bar

The area to the left of the Folder List is called the Shortcut Bar. It displays shortcuts to various Desktop functionality and folders. Again, like Microsoft Windows Explorer, you can add shortcuts to any location that appears in your Folder List. The individual shortcuts can also be organized into user-defined shortcut groups, which is especially useful for large MicroStrategy implementations.

When you open MicroStrategy Desktop, you will already have two shortcut groups by default—Tutorial Shortcuts and Other Shortcuts.

To show the Shortcut Bar:

1 On the View menu, select Shortcut Bar.

The Shortcut Bar opens on the left side of the MicroStrategy Desktop window.

To add a shortcut to the Shortcut Bar:

1 On the Shortcut bar, click the shortcut group to which you want to add the shortcut.

2 In the Folder List, right-click the location, such as a project or folder, you want to add to the Shortcut Bar and select Add to Shortcut Bar.

Your new shortcut appears on the Shortcut Bar.

To remove a shortcut from the Shortcut Bar:

1 On the Shortcut Bar, right-click the shortcut and select Remove from Shortcut Bar.

2 In the confirmation window, click Yes if you are sure you want to remove the shortcut.

Page 46: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials2

46 The MicroStrategy Desktop Interface © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To create a new shortcut group:

1 On the Shortcut Bar, right-click an empty area and select Add Group.

2 In the Create a new shortcut group window, type a name for the shortcut group.

3 Click OK.

Your new shortcut group appears in the Shortcut Bar.

Page 47: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 2

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Basic Navigation 47

Basic Navigation

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Navigate and use the MicroStrategy Desktop menus and toolbars.

The MicroStrategy Desktop Menu Bar

MicroStrategy Desktop has the following menus available on the menu bar:

MicroStrategy Desktop Menus

Menu Description

File Enables you to create new objects and folders

Edit Enables you to access the Cut, Copy, and Paste functions typically found in a Microsoft Windows Edit menu

View Enables you to change the appearance of the icons in the Object Viewer. You can also show or hide the Status Bar, Shortcut Bar, and Folder List from this menu.

Go Enables you to move one level up in the Folder List or go directly to the project home page

Tools Enables you to access general Desktop tools such as the Search Editor, Desktop Preferences, and the Change Password window

Administration Enables you to access administrative functions such as the Project Configuration Editor and the Database Instance Wizard

Schema Enables you to access project design tools such as the Project Creation Wizard and the Attribute and Fact Creation Wizards

Window Enables you to close all open editors with one click

Help Enables you to access the online help system and provides links to useful MicroStrategy web sites

Page 48: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials2

48 Basic Navigation © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

The menus and options available to you depend on your security privileges. For example, if you do not have administrative privileges, you will not see the Administration menu.

The MicroStrategy Desktop Toolbar

The following table describes the main MicroStrategy Desktop toolbar:

MicroStrategy Desktop Toolbar Buttons

Name Button Description

New object Creates a new object. The objects you can create from this button vary depending on your privileges and your location in the Folder List.

Cut Cuts the currently selected objects

Copy Copies the currently selected objects

Paste Pastes whatever you have cut or copied

Delete the object selected

Deletes the currently selected objects

Rename the object selected

Enables you to rename the currently selected object

View object properties

Opens the Properties window for the currently selected object.

Search for objects in the project

Opens the Search Editor

Edit the selected object

Opens the editor for the currently selected object

Page 49: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 2

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Basic Navigation 49

The specific functionality of some of the toolbar buttons varies depending on your location in the Folder List. For example, if you are working in the Filters folder in a project, clicking the New object button on the toolbar opens the Filter Editor. However, if you are working in the Reports folder in a project, clicking the New object button opens the Report Editor.

Run Runs the currently selected reports

View Enables you to change the appearance of the icons in the Object Viewer

Show or hide the folder list

Toggles the Folder List display

Refresh object with latest definition

Refreshes the current display

Go to project Takes you to the home page for the project in which you are currently navigating

Go one level up Enables you to move one level up in the Folder List

Update Schema Refreshes the warehouse structure that is stored in memory. The schema should be updated when any structural changes are made to the warehouse or datamodel.

MicroStrategy Desktop Toolbar Buttons

Name Button Description

Page 50: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials2

50 Creating and Saving Objects © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Creating and Saving Objects

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

List the different ways to create and save new objects.

Creating Objects

There are three ways to access the editors and wizards used to create new objects:

• On the File menu, select New, followed by the object you want to create, like a report or filter.

• On the toolbar, click New object.

The New object button looks and functions differently depending on your location in the Folder List.

• Right-click in an empty area in the Object Viewer, select New, followed by the object you want to create, like a report or filter.

If you right-click an object instead of an empty area in the Object Viewer, you will not get the correct menu.

Page 51: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 2

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating and Saving Objects 51

There are many different types of objects you can create in MicroStrategy Desktop. They can be grouped into three types of objects—schema objects, application objects, and configuration objects. Schema objects are used to create application objects. Application objects are used to create other application objects. Schema objects and application objects are represented in the following illustration:

Schema and Application Objects

For more information on Configuration objects see the MicroStrategy Architect: Project Design Essentials course.

Page 52: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials2

52 Creating and Saving Objects © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Saving Objects

Depending on which object editor or wizard you are using, you can save objects in the following ways:

• On the File menu, select Save.

• On the File menu, select Save As.

• On the toolbar, click Save and New.

• On the toolbar, click Save and Close.

The first time you save an object, the Save As window opens, which enables you to specify the name and the location where the object will be saved. The default save location is the folder in which you are working when you open the object editor or wizard.

Page 53: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 2

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Shortcuts to Objects 53

Shortcuts to Objects

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Create shortcuts to MicroStrategy objects.

As you learned earlier in this lesson, you can add shortcuts to locations with the Shortcut Bar. You also have the ability to create shortcuts to many existing MicroStrategy objects, such as reports or filters. Shortcuts to objects enable you to better organize objects in a MicroStrategy project, while still maintaining standard locations for those objects.

A shortcut is simply a link to an existing MicroStrategy object in the project and behaves similarly to the shortcut functionality available in Microsoft Windows operating systems.

There are two ways to create shortcuts to existing MicroStrategy objects:

• On the File menu, point to New, and select Shortcut. In the Open window, locate the object for which you want to create the shortcut, and click Open.

The shortcut is created in your current location and is named after the original object.

• Right-click the object to which you want to create a shortcut and select Create shortcut. In the Browse for Folder window, select the location in which you want to create the shortcut and click OK.

The shortcut is named after the original object.

An object with shortcuts pointed to it cannot be deleted until its dependent shortcuts are deleted.

You can also edit the target of an existing shortcut.

Page 54: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials2

54 Shortcuts to Objects © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To edit the target of a shortcut to an object:

1 In the Folder List, select the shortcut you want to edit.

2 On the File menu, select Properties.

OR

Right-click the shortcut and select Properties.

3 In the Properties window, in the Categories list, select Shortcut.

4 Modify the Target property by browsing to the desired object or by typing in the folder path to the desired object, as shown below:

Properties Window

5 Click OK to close the Properties window.

The shortcut is automatically renamed after the new target object.

Page 55: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 2

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Lesson Summary 55

Lesson Summary

In this lesson you learned:

• MicroStrategy Desktop is the next-generation business intelligence environment designed to meet today’s sophisticated business intelligence requirements. It brings integrated querying and reporting, powerful collaborative analytics, and investigative workflow to every desktop.

• MicroStrategy Desktop is available in two versions—Desktop Analyst, a simplified version that provides interactive slice and dice capabilities to users and Desktop Designer, a full-featured version that enables report developers to design complex and sophisticated reports and documents.

• MicroStrategy Architect is the innovative development environment designed to meet today’s sophisticated business intelligence requirements.

• The Administration icon provides access to all of the administrative functions for a project source.

• A project is the intersection of a data warehouse, a metadata database, and a user community. It contains objects such as reports, filters, templates, and metrics.

• In the MicroStrategy Desktop interface, there are three main areas—the Folder List, the Object Viewer, and the Shortcut Bar.

• There are many different types of objects you can create in MicroStrategy Desktop. They can be grouped into three types of objects—schema objects, application objects, and configuration objects.

• Schema objects are used to create application objects. Application objects are used to create other application objects.

Page 56: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials2

56 Lesson Summary © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• Shortcuts to objects enable you to better organize objects in a MicroStrategy project, while still maintaining standard locations for those objects.

• A shortcut is simply a link to an existing MicroStrategy object in the project and behaves similarly to the shortcut functionality available in Microsoft Windows operating systems.

Page 57: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 57

3REPORTS

Lesson Description

This lesson introduces you to report definition and report creation in MicroStrategy Desktop.

Page 58: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

58 Lesson Objectives © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

Define the components that comprise a report and create simple reports using MicroStrategy Desktop.

After completing the topics in this lesson, you will be able to:

• Explain the components that make up a report. (Page 59)

• Use the Report Editor to create and save reports. Execute reports, and change their display view. (Page 61)

Page 59: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. What Is a Report? 59

What Is a Report?

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Explain the components that make up a report.

Reports are the focus of business intelligence analysis. They enable users to gather business insight through data analysis. The results from any MicroStrategy Desktop report is often just a starting point for further business intelligence investigations.

A report is a request for specific, formatted data from the data warehouse. It consists of a template plus any desired filtering criteria, as shown below:

Components of a Report

A template specifies what information to retrieve from the data warehouse and how this information will be displayed in the report results.

A report filter specifies the conditions that the data must meet to be included in the report results.

Page 60: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

60 What Is a Report? © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

A view of a report is the actual view of a report subset. With MicroStrategy OLAP Services, users have the ability to remove objects or filter within a result set such that their view of the report result set is a subset of the overall result set.

Creating report views requires MicroStrategy OLAP Services, an add-on application. For more information on creating report views with MicroStrategy OLAP Services, see the “MicroStrategy OLAP Services” lesson starting on page 289.

When a report is executed, you obtain a formatted collection of all of the objects (such as attributes and metrics) specified on the template that have satisfied the filtering conditions of the report filter. For example, a report can show you a list of stores in a specific region, the price and volume of stock for a given period of time, or other important information. You can change the report’s formatting details to suit your requirements and preferences.

Whenever you create a report, you also create a template and a report filter. Though you may not specifically define and use a separate template or report filter object, these are the objects that logically make up a report definition.

Page 61: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports 61

Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Use the Report Editor to create and save reports. Execute reports, and change their display view.

The Report Editor

When you choose to create a new report, the Report Editor opens, as shown below:

Report Editor

Page 62: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

62 Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

You use the Report Editor to create and modify reports. It is a combination of the Filter Editor, the Template Editor, the Object Browser, the Shortcut Bar, the Report Objects window, and the View Filter definition window, and it enables you, through one editor, to create your template and report filter for a specific report. These components perform the following functions:

• Report Filter definition window—Enables you to add attribute, metric, and advanced filter qualifications, as well as copies or shortcuts to existing report filter objects without having to open another object editor. Simple filters can be created by dragging and dropping attribute elements from the Object Browser (described below) into this window.

• Template definition window—Enables you to define the report layout by dragging and dropping objects from the Object Browser (described below) into this window

• Object Browser—Allows you to navigate through the project to locate objects you wish to use in the report definition

• My Shortcuts—Enables you to jump to locations in the Object Browser. You can customize your shortcuts as discussed in the previous lesson

For more information on customizing your shortcuts, see “Shortcut Bar” starting on page 45.

• Report Objects window—Enables you to see a summary of all of the objects you have included on your template, even if they are not initially displayed in the report view. The MicroStrategy Engine generates SQL that includes all of the objects in this window, not just the ones that are displayed when the report is run.

This window is only available if you have MicroStrategy OLAP Services. For more information on MicroStrategy OLAP Services, see “MicroStrategy OLAP Services” starting on page 289.

For more information on the MicroStrategy Engine, refer to the MicroStrategy Engine Essentials course.

Page 63: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports 63

• View Filter definition window—Enables you to filter on any object that is in the Report Objects window. View filters do not modify the SQL for the report. Instead, they are applied to the overall result set by the Analytical Engine component of the MicroStrategy Engine. The cache for the report contains the entire result set, but only the subset of information that meets the view filter conditions displays in the report view.

This window is only available if you have MicroStrategy OLAP Services. For more information on MicroStrategy OLAP Services, see “MicroStrategy OLAP Services” starting on page 289.

A report cache is simply a report result set that is saved on MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. When you execute a report and a valid report cache exists for your request, you can retrieve the results from the report cache rather than having to query the data warehouse. In this way, caching helps improve report performance. For more information on report caching, refer to the System Administration Guide product manual.

Page 64: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

64 Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Creating Reports

As mentioned, whenever you create a report you also create a template and a report filter. Though you may not specifically define and use a separate template or report filter object, these are the objects that logically make up a report definition.

The Template

A template specifies what information to retrieve from the data warehouse and how this information will be displayed in the report results. You can create template objects separately using the Template Editor, or you can create them on the fly in the Report Editor.

To define the template, you can either drag and drop objects from the Object Browser into the template definition window, or you can right-click the object in the Object Browser and select Add to Rows or Add to Columns. Each object placed on the template becomes a row or column header, which organizes the data in the final report result display. The empty cells below the headers in the template are place holders for the actual data that will be returned from the data warehouse after the report is executed.

The layout of a template can be cross-tab or tabular:

• A cross-tab layout is useful for multidimensional analysis, like a report with location information in the columns and corresponding sales information in the rows, as shown below:

Example of a Cross-tab Layout

South North

Atlanta Miami Boston New York

Sales ($) 100 200 300 400

Page 65: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports 65

• A tabular layout is useful for simple lists of information, like a column of regions and a column of stores, followed by a columns of sales figures, as shown below:

Templates may contain any of the following objects, in any combination:

• Attribute—Representation of a specific level of data calculation or aggregation

• Consolidation—“Virtual” attribute that is created based on existing attribute elements. It enables you to analyze data at levels that do not explicitly exist in the data warehouse. The following report demonstrates an example of a consolidation that displays revenue information for each customer income level:

Report with Consolidation

In this example, there are no low, middle, and high income levels defined in the data warehouse, so you create these levels by grouping together income ranges, which do exist in the data warehouse. For more information on consolidations, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

Example of a Tabular Layout

Region Store Sales($)

South Atlanta 100

South Miami 200

North Boston 300

North New York 400

Page 66: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

66 Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• Custom Group—Custom attribute grouping that is created based on filter qualifications. It enables you to apply row-level filter conditions. The following report demonstrates a custom group that displays revenue information for the top 10 customers and the top 10 items:

Report with Custom Group

For more information on custom groups refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

• Metric—Calculation built from facts in the data warehouse. All the metrics are grouped together and bound to one axis (the rows or the columns).

For more information on metrics, see the “Metrics” lesson starting on page 245.

• Object Prompt—Enables you to select specific objects to include on the report template at report run time.

For more information on object prompts, see “Object Prompts” starting on page 338.

Page 67: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports 67

The Report Filter

A report filter specifies the conditions that the data must meet to be included in the report results.

You can create report filter objects separately using the Filter Editor, or you can create them on the fly in the Report Editor. For this lesson, you will use the Report Editor.

To define the report filter, you can drag and drop objects from the Object Browser onto the report filter definition window.

Create a Simple Report

A simple report typically has at least one attribute, one metric, and a report filter. Not all of these components are required, but the data returned is often more meaningful when you use them.

Technically, you can create a report with just one attribute on its template. When you execute the report, it returns a list of all the attribute elements for that attribute. For example, a report containing just the Year attribute would return a list of years from the data warehouse.

Adding a metric to the report provides another level of detail, enabling you to learn more about the attribute on the template. Using the Year example again, adding a sales metric to the template calculates total sales for each year.

Finally, a report filter enables you to limit the data to a specific area of interest. For example, perhaps you only want to see sales information for the year 2005.

To launch the Report Editor:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the File menu, point to New, and select Report.

2 In the New Grid window, in the list of report object templates, select Blank Report.

Page 68: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

68 Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

3 Click OK.

To add an attribute to the template definition window:

1 In the Report Editor, in the Object Browser, navigate to the Data Explorer.

2 Double-click the desired hierarchy to display the list of attributes included in that hierarchy.

3 Select an attribute and drag and drop it into the template definition window.

OR

Right-click the attribute and select Add to Rows or Add to Columns.

To add a metric to the template definition window:

1 In the Object Browser, locate the metric you want to add to the template.

2 Double-click the metric to add it to the columns of the template.

OR

Drag and drop the metric into the template definition window.

OR

Right-click the metric and select Add to Rows or Add to Columns.

Recall that all metrics are grouped together and bound to one axis (the rows or the columns).

To add a basic report filter condition:

1 In the Object Browser, double-click the desired hierarchy to display the list of attributes included in that hierarchy.

Page 69: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports 69

2 Double-click an attribute to see a list of its attribute elements.

3 Select the attribute elements for which you want data returned and drag and drop the attribute elements into the filter definition window.

Using Predefined Template and Filter Objects

The previous discussion taught you how to define the template and the report filter from within the Report Editor. However, you can also create a report using existing template and report filter objects.

If using an existing template object in a report, you have two options:

• Replace with shortcut to template: Changes you make to the template from within the Report Editor are propagated to the original template and any other reports that use a shortcut to the template. Similarly, changes made to the template object from within the Template Editor are propagated to the report and any other reports that use a shortcut to the template.

• Replace with copy of template: Changes you make to the template from within the Report Editor are not propagated to the original template. Similarly, changes made to the template object from within the Template Editor are not propagated to the report. This is also called a local template and is the same as creating a template on the fly in the Report Editor.

To add a predefined template object:

1 In the Report Editor, in the Object Browser, browse to the template object you want to add to the report definition.

2 Right-click the template object and select Replace with shortcut to template or Replace with copy of template.

OR

Page 70: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

70 Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

On the Template menu, select Replace with shortcut to template or Replace with copy of template.

If using an existing report filter object in a report, you have three options:

• Add to Report Filter: Adds the report filter object to the report. You cannot make changes to the report filter object from within the Report Editor, but changes made to the report filter object from within the Filter Editor are propagated to the report and any other reports that use the report filter object.

You can continue to add other report filter conditions to the report from within the Report Editor.

• Replace Report Filter with a shortcut to this filter: Changes you make to the report filter from within the Report Editor are propagated to the original report filter and any other reports that use a shortcut to the report filter. Similarly, changes made to the report filter object from within the Filter Editor are propagated to the report and any other reports that use a shortcut to the report filter.

You can continue to add other report filter conditions to the report from within the Report Editor.

• Replace Report Filter with a copy of this filter: Changes you make to the report filter from within the Report Editor are not propagated to the original report filter. Similarly, changes made to the report filter object from within the Filter Editor are not propagated to the report. This is also called a local or embedded filter and is the same as creating a filter on the fly in the Report Editor.

To add a predefined report filter object:

1 In the Report Editor, in the Object Browser, browse to the report filter object you want to add to the report definition.

Page 71: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports 71

2 Right-click the report filter object and select Add to Report Filter, Replace Report Filter with a shortcut to this filter, or Replace Report Filter with a copy of this filter.

OR

Double-click the report filter object.

This method defaults to the Add to Report Filter option.

OR

Drag and drop it into the filter definition window.

This method defaults to the Add to Report Filter option.

Saving Reports

After you create a report, you can save the report, so you can execute it again in the future. When you save a report, its name and definition (the template, all report filtering criteria, and any report formatting) are stored in the MicroStrategy metadata database. When you want to execute the report again, you can double-click it to retrieve the latest results. Saving a report creates a predefined report.

To save a report:

1 In a report, on the File menu, select Save.

2 In the Save Report As window, navigate to the location where you want to save the report.

3 Name the report.

4 Click Save.

Reports, or any other object, can be saved into any folder. MicroStrategy objects do not have to be organized into folders by object type. For example, you can save a report into a folder with metrics and filters.

Page 72: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

72 Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

It is good practice to create and adhere to corporate standard naming and storage conventions to make it easier to locate objects as your MicroStrategy project grows.

The template and the report filter object can also be saved as standalone MicroStrategy objects, separate from the report, allowing them to be reused later.

To save a template from the Report Editor:

1 On the Template menu, select Save Template As.

2 In the Save Template As window, browse to the location where you want to save the template.

3 Name the template.

4 Click Save.

To save a report filter from the Report Editor:

1 On the Filter menu, select Save Filter As.

2 In the Save Filter As window, browse to the location where you want to save the filter.

3 Name the filter.

4 Click Save.

Advanced Save Options

If you use a shortcut to a predefined template or report filter object to define your report, you will see additional save options when saving your report. These options give you several choices:

Page 73: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports 73

Create a local copy of the filter—If you choose this option, changes you make to the report filter in the Report Editor are not propagated to the original filter object, and vice versa. This is also called a local or embedded filter.

Retain the shortcut to the filter—If you choose this option, changes you make to the report filter in the Report Editor are propagated to the original filter object, and vice versa. Creating shortcuts allows you to take advantage of the benefits of object reuse.

Create a local copy of the template—If you choose this option, changes you make to the template in the Report Editor are not propagated to the original template object, and vice versa. This is also called a local or embedded template.

Retain the shortcut to the template—If you choose this option, changes you make to the template in the Report Editor are propagated to the original template object, and vice versa. Creating shortcuts allows you to take advantage of the benefits of object reuse.

Remember options next time—If you choose this option, your advanced save options become the new default options for future advanced save actions.

Running Reports

To run a report:

1 In the Object Viewer, select the report you want to execute.

2 On the File menu, select Run.

OR

Double-click the report.

OR

Right-click the report and select Run.

Page 74: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

74 Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

OR

On the toolbar, click Run.

The report results display in the default report display view. The default report display view is the report display view that was selected when the report was last saved. Report display views are discussed in the following section.

Report Display Views

There are five report display views:

• Design View—Displays the Report Editor, so you can view and modify the report definition

• Grid View—Displays the report in a row and column format

• Graph View—Displays the report as a graph

• Grid/Graph View—Displays the report as a grid and a graph, side-by-side.

• SQL View—Displays the SQL used to generate the report. Any Analytical Engine steps that are taken after all of the data has been returned from the data warehouse to produce the final report results are also displayed.

To change the report display view:

1 In the report results window, on the View menu, select the report display view you want to see.

OR

In the report results window, on the toolbar, beside the View button, click the arrow, and select the report display view you want to see.

Page 75: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports 75

In addition to changing the report view, there are many formatting options that you can change. For example, grid reports have autostyles. Autostyles are predefined formatting schemes that are available when viewing a report in grid view.

To change a grid report’s formatting using autostyles:

1 Run a report and change it to grid view if necessary.

2 On the toolbar, in the autostyle drop-down list, select the autostyle you want to use to format the report.

Report Details Properties

The Report Details Properties window enables you to configure what information you want to display in the report details section and how it should be presented. For instance, you can specify whether you want to display filter details, the specific filter details to display, and how they should be formatted. You can define how to display the operators within filter details, how to display unanswered prompts, and many other formatting properties.

Page 76: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

76 Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

The image below shows the Report Details Properties window:

Report Details Properties Window

The Report Details Properties window consists of the following tabs:

General

The General tab of the Report Details Properties window contains configuration options for the report, prompt, and filter details. The window contains the following sections:

• Report Details—Includes the report description, prompt details, filter details, and template details. You can choose to include or omit any of this information.

• Prompt Details—Displays prompt related information for all prompts in the report. You can choose to include or omit any of this information.

Page 77: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports 77

• Miscellaneous—You can specify whether delimiters are used in report details that display metadata objects, such as attributes and metrics. You can also set aliases to display instead of the object name in Filter Details.

By default, each setting on this tab inherits the project setting defined in Project Configuration/Project Definition/Document and Report setting.

Filter Details - Contents

The Filter Details - Contents tab of the Report Details Properties window contains configuration options for the filter details, which displays information about filters on the report. This tab enables you to select which filter expressions to include (report filter, view filter, report limits, and so on) and how the filters are displayed. For example, you can select whether to include labels (that is, Report Filter, Report Limits, and so on) and the order in which the filter expressions are displayed.

By default, each setting on this tab inherits the project setting defined in Project Configuration/Project Definition/Document and Report setting.

The window contains the following sections:

• General—Enables you to select whether to include or omit filter sub-expressions.

• Additional Options—You can configure how the filters are displayed in the Filter Details.

Page 78: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

78 Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Filter Details - Other

The Filter Details - Other tab enables you to specify how logical operators and other components of different qualification types are displayed. The Filter Details - Other tab is shown below:

Report Details Properties Window

Page 79: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating, Saving, and Viewing Reports 79

Template Details

The Template Details tab contains configuration options for the template details, including attribute details and metric details.

To configure report details properties:

1 Open a report.

2 On the Data menu, select Report Details Properties.

3 Modify the properties as needed.

4 Click OK.

If you do not see the report details display in the Report details window, you need to clear the Apply these Desktop preferences to the report details check box under Desktop Preferences.

Page 80: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

80 Exercises: Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Exercises: Reports

All of these exercises should be completed in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project in the three-tier project source.

Create a Report

Overview

In this exercise, you will create a new folder called My Reports Exercises in the My Reports folder. In the My Reports Exercises folder, you will create a report to show the Revenue and Profit for all Call Centers during 2008. This report will also show the Region to which each Call Center belongs. The first few rows of the results should look like the following:

You will save this report as Revenue and Profit for 2008. You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Page 81: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Reports 81

Detailed Instructions

Create the My Reports Exercises Folder

1 In the MicroStrategy Tutorial project, in the Folder List, expand the My Personal Objects folder and select the My Reports folder.

2 On the File menu, point to New, and then select Folder.

3 Name the new folder My Reports Exercises.

Create the Report

4 In the Folder List, select your new My Reports Exercises folder to begin working in it.

5 On the File menu, point to New, and select Report.

6 In the New Grid window, leave Blank Report selected and click OK.

When the Report Editor opens, the Data Explorer is automatically selected in the Object Browser. The System Hierarchy and other user-defined hierarchies created for the project are listed.

Define the Template

7 In the Object Browser, double-click the Geography hierarchy to expand it.

8 Drag and drop Region into the rows of the template definition window.

You might find it easier to right-click the object and select Add to Rows.

9 Drag and drop Call Center into the rows of the template definition window.

You might find it easier to right-click the object and select Add to Rows.

10 In My Shortcuts, click Metrics.

Page 82: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

82 Exercises: Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To display My Shortcuts, go to the View menu and select Shortcuts.

11 In the Object Browser double-click the Sales Metrics folder.

12 Drag and drop Revenue into the columns area of the template definition window.

You can also right-click the object and select Add to Columns.

You can also double-click the metrics to place them into the columns of your template.

13 Drag and drop Profit into the columns area of the template definition window.

Your template definition should now look like this:

If your template looks slightly different, you may need to reposition the attributes and metrics.

Specify the Report Filter Condition

14 Click Data Explorer.

15 Double-click the Time hierarchy to expand it.

16 Double-click the Year attribute to expand it.

17 Drag and drop 2008 into the report filter definition window.

18 In the Report Editor, click Run Report..

19 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

Page 83: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Reports 83

Save the Report

20 In the report results window, click Save and Close.

21 In the Save Report As window, name the report Revenue and Profit for 2008.

22 Click Save.

Work with Design View

Overview

In this exercise, you will modify the Revenue and Profit for 2008 report to show only the Call Centers in the Eastern USA.

Do not create a new report for this exercise. Modify your existing Revenue and Profit for 2008 report.

The results should look like the following:

You will save this report to the My Reports Exercises folder and name it East Revenue and Profit for 2008. You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Page 84: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

84 Exercises: Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Detailed Instructions

1 Go to the My Reports Exercises folder and double-click the Revenue and Profit for 2008 report you just created to run it.

2 In the report results window, from the View menu, select Design View.

3 In the Object Browser, double-click the Geography hierarchy to expand it.

4 Double-click the Region attribute to expand it.

5 Select Northeast.

6 While holding down the CTRL key on your keyboard, select Mid-Atlantic and Southeast.

7 Drag and drop the three regions into the report filter definition window to add them to your existing report filter condition, Year In list (2008).

Save the Report

8 On the File menu, select Save As.

9 In the Save Report As window, save the report as East Revenue and Profit for 2008.

10 Click Save.

11 On the toolbar, click Grid View to run the report.

12 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

13 In the report, click Save and Close to close the report.

Page 85: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Reports 85

Use the Template Editor

Overview

In this exercise, you will create a new template called Sales by Quarter and Month. This new template can be reused in multiple reports, and you will use it in your next exercise.

The template should have Quarter and Month attributes in the rows and the Revenue and Units Sold metrics in the columns. The template should look like the following:

You will save this template into a new folder, My Templates Exercises. You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In the Folder List, expand the My Personal Objects folder and select the My Objects folder.

2 On the File menu, select New, followed by Folder.

3 Name the folder My Templates Exercises.

Page 86: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

86 Exercises: Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

4 In the Folder List, expand the My Objects folder and select the new My Templates Exercises folder to begin working in it.

5 On the File menu, select New, followed by Template.

6 In the New Template window, leave Empty Template selected and click OK.

When the Template Editor opens, the Data Explorer is automatically selected in the Object Browser. The System Hierarchy and other user-defined hierarchies created for the project are listed.

7 In the Object Browser, double-click the Time hierarchy to expand it.

8 Drag and drop Quarter into the rows of the template definition window.

9 Drag and drop Month to the right of Quarter in the template definition window.

10 In My Shortcuts, click Metrics.

11 In the Object Browser, double-click the Sales Metrics folder.

12 Double-click Revenue to add it to the columns of the template.

13 Double-click Units Sold to add it to the right of Revenue in the columns of the template.

14 In the Template Editor, click Save and Close.

15 In the Save Template As window, navigate to the My Templates Exercises folder, and name the template Sales by Quarter and Month.

16 Click Save.

Page 87: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Reports 87

Use an Existing Template and No Filtering Criteria

Overview

To use an existing template, you must include it as part of a report. In this exercise, you will use the Sales by Quarter and Month template from the last exercise in a report with no filtering criteria.

Because there is no filtering criteria, the final result will include data from the entire data warehouse. The first few rows of the result set will look like the following:

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In the Folder List, select the My Reports Exercises folder to begin working in it.

2 On the File menu, select New, followed by Report.

3 In the New Grid window, keep Blank Report selected and click OK.

Page 88: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

88 Exercises: Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

4 In the Report Editor, in My Shortcuts, click My Personal Objects.

5 In the Object Browser, double-click the My Objects folder.

6 Double-click the My Templates Exercises folder.

7 Right-click the Sales by Quarter and Month template, and select Replace with shortcut to template.

For this report, you will not include any filtering criteria.

8 On the toolbar, click Save and Close.

9 In the Save Report As window, navigate to the My Reports Exercises folder, and save the report as Sales by Quarter and Month.

10 Click Save.

11 Click Retain the shortcut to the template.

12 Keep the Remember options next time check box selected.

13 Click OK.

14 In the Folder List, select the My Reports Exercises folder and double-click your new report to run it.

15 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

16 On the toolbar, click Save and Close to close the report.

Page 89: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Reports 89

Extra Credit

Try this exercise if you have time and want a challenge.

1 The marketing manager in your business wants to run a special promotion for customers paying by various payment methods. She would like to see a report that shows how customers in different income brackets are paying (in terms of Revenue) for their orders. She is specifically interested in the Mid-Atlantic customer region for the Year 2008.

Customer Region, Income Bracket, and Payment Method are attributes in the Customers hierarchy.

Be sure to filter on the Customer Region attribute of the Customers hierarchy and not the Region attribute of the Geography hierarchy.

You also know she likes to see report results in the Classic format.

You will need to change the autostyle of this report to format it correctly.

When you finish, your report should look like the following:

Page 90: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

90 Exercises: Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Feel free to save the report in the My Reports Exercises folder with a name of your choosing. There are no detailed instructions for this Extra Credit exercise.

2 Now modify the previous report to find out the Revenue in 2008 for the Mid-Atlantic customer region when customers used Visa as their preferred payment method. This report would be useful when you need to decide which items should go on promotion. The report result set should now look like the following:

Feel free to save the report in the My Reports Exercises folder with a name of your choosing. There are no detailed instructions for this Extra Credit exercise.

Answer the following questions when you have completed the exercise.

• How many rows did this report return? ___________

• How can you find the number of rows without actually counting them?

_______________________________________

_______________________________________

_______________________________________

Page 91: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Reports 3

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Lesson Summary 91

Lesson Summary

In this lesson your learned:

• A report is a request for specific, formatted data from the data warehouse. It consists of a template plus any desired filtering criteria.

• A template specifies what information to retrieve from the data warehouse and how this information will be displayed in the report results.

• A report filter specifies the conditions that the data must meet to be included in the report results.

• A view of a report is the actual view of a report subset. With MicroStrategy OLAP Services, users have the ability to remove objects or filter within a result set such that their view of the report result set is a subset of the overall result set.

• When a report is executed, you obtain a formatted collection of all of the objects (such as attributes and metrics) specified on the template that have satisfied the filtering conditions of the report filter.

• Whenever you create a report, you also create a template and a report filter. Though you may not specifically define and use a separate template or report filter object, these are the objects that logically make up a report definition.

• You use the Report Editor to create and modify reports. It is a combination of the Filter Editor, the Template Editor, the Object Browser, the Shortcut Bar, the Report Objects window, and the View Filter definition window, and it enables you, through one editor, to create your template and report filter for a specific report.

• After you create a report, you can save the report, so you can execute it again in the future.

• There are five report display views—Design View, Grid View, Graph View, Grid/Graph View, and SQL View.

Page 92: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Reports MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials3

92 Lesson Summary © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Page 93: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 93

4REPORT MANIPULATIONS

Lesson Description

This lesson describes report manipulations that you can perform in MicroStrategy Desktop.

Page 94: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

94 Lesson Objectives © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

Define the different types of report manipulations available and perform these report manipulations using MicroStrategy Desktop.

After completing the topics in this lesson, you will be able to:

• Describe and perform manipulations that enable you to look at report data from different perspectives. (Page 96)

• Explain the purpose of drilling and drill on reports in MicroStrategy Desktop using a variety of drilling methods and options. (Page 97)

• Explain the purpose of page-by. Use page-by to segment data on a report in MicroStrategy Desktop. (Page 106)

• Explain the purpose of data pivoting. Pivot data on a report in MicroStrategy Desktop by changing the order of objects in the rows or columns and moving objects between the rows and columns. (Page 110)

• Apply subtotals to a report in MicroStrategy Desktop. (Page 112)

• Sort data in a report in MicroStrategy Desktop using a quick sort or an advanced sort. (Page 119)

• Explain the purpose of outline mode. Display a report in outline mode in MicroStrategy Desktop. (Page 125)

• Print a boardroom quality report. (Page 129)

• Export a report from MicroStrategy Desktop to another application. Format and e-mail reports as attachments. (Page 131)

• Deliver reports to the history list, update caches, and mobile devices. (Page 134)

Page 95: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Lesson Objectives 95

• View and add notes to reports and documents. (Page 139)

• Describe and perform report manipulations in MicroStrategy Desktop that enable you to change the formatting of report data. (Page 142)

• Make formatting changes to reports in MicroStrategy Desktop. Create, save, and use autostyles. (Page 143)

• Explain the purpose of thresholds and apply thresholds to a report in MicroStrategy Desktop. (Page 148)

• Explain the purpose of banding and apply custom banding to a report in MicroStrategy Desktop. (Page 155)

• Lock row and column headers and resize columns in MicroStrategy Desktop. (Page 158)

• Describe some of the basic graph properties and modify a graph report in MicroStrategy Desktop. (Page 161)

Page 96: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

96 Part I - Data Manipulation © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Part I - Data Manipulation

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Describe and perform manipulations that enable you to look at report data from different perspectives.

This section covers report manipulations that enable you to change how data is presented in a report, so you can see the data from different perspectives. Report manipulations that involve changing the format of report data are covered in Part II - Style Manipulations.

Page 97: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Drilling 97

Drilling

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Explain the purpose of drilling and drill on reports in MicroStrategy Desktop using a variety of drilling methods and options.

What is Drilling?

Drilling enables you to see data at levels other than that of the original grid or graph. It helps you investigate the data on your report quickly and easily. The following diagram shows how you can display additional detail through drilling:

Drilling

In MicroStrategy Desktop, you can drill down or up within a hierarchy or across to other hierarchies. You can even drill to a completely different template.

• Drilling down enables you to access data at a lower attribute level in the same hierarchy. For example, if a report shows you sales by Month, you can drill down to see sales by Day.

• Drilling up does the opposite of drilling down. You can see data at a higher attribute level in the same hierarchy. For example, you can drill up from the Day level to the Month or Quarter levels.

Page 98: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

98 Drilling © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• Drilling to other directions lets you view data at any level in any hierarchy. For example, you could drill from Day in the Time hierarchy across to Region in the Geography hierarchy.

• Drilling to a template lets you follow an investigative workflow. A report developer can set up a report so that drilling takes you to another report with the same filter, but a different template.

A report developer configures the drill to template option by using the Drill Map Editor. For more information on the Drill Map Editor, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

When you drill on a report, the original report remains open, and the drilled-to report displays in a new window.

Page 99: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Drilling 99

Methods for Drilling

When you drill on a report, you can drill on the entire report or only on part of the report. There are several drilling methods you can use, all of which are discussed below:

Methods for Drilling

• Double-click an attribute element—You can drill down one level for a single element.

– For example, if your report shows two years, 2006 and 2007, you can double-click either 2006 or 2007 to drill down and see the quarter level data for that year.

• Right-click one or more elements—You can select one or more elements (by holding down SHIFT or CTRL) to drill on them. Right-click to open a shortcut menu that lists the possible drill directions and drill paths.

• Use the Drill menu option or toolbar button—You can drill on either the entire report or only selected items.

Page 100: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

100 Drilling © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To use the menu or toolbar to drill:

1 Run a report.

2 On the Data menu, select Drill.

OR

On the toolbar, click the Drill.

If the toolbar buttons are not visible by default, on the View menu, click Toolbar and select Data.

Drill

Page 101: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Drilling 101

3 In the Drill window, in the Selected object drop-down list, select the object on which you want to drill. You can drill on attributes, compound metrics, consolidations, and custom groups, as shown below:

Drill Window

4 In the Drilling options window, under Drilling options, browse to the attribute to which you want to drill.

5 Choose whether to keep the parent.

6 Choose whether to keep the thresholds.

7 Choose whether to inherit subtotals from parent.

8 Click OK to drill.

Page 102: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

102 Drilling © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

If you are using the page-by functionality on the original report, you will also see the When drilling, add the current page-by element as part of the filter check box. For more information on page-by, see “Page-by” starting on page 106.

Keep Parent

The Keep parent option in the Drill window lets you determine whether or not you want to add the attribute from which you drilled to the new drilled-to report’s template.

For example, consider the following report showing revenue by year. The original report from which you are drilling is shown below:

Yearly Revenue Report

If you drill down to Month from Year 2009 and do not set Keep parent to Yes, you see the following report, where Year has been replaced by Month:

Keep Parent Set to No

Page 103: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Drilling 103

If, instead, you set Keep parent to Yes, you see the following report, where Month is added to the template along with Year:

Keep Parent Set to Yes

If you leave Keep parent as Default, the Keep parent setting is inherited from the report or project-level settings.

To set the Keep parent setting at the report level:

1 Run a report.

2 On the Data menu, select Report Data Options.

3 In the Categories list, expand General.

Page 104: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

104 Drilling © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

4 Select Drilling, as shown below:

Keep Parent Set at Report Level

5 In the Keep parent while drilling drop-down list, select Yes.

6 Click OK.

7 In the report results window, on the File menu, select Save.

To set the Keep parent setting at the project level:

The following steps change the default setting for all reports in a MicroStrategy project to keep the parent attributes while drilling.

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop while logged in to a MicroStrategy project, on the Tools menu, select My Preferences.

2 In the My Preferences window, in the Categories list, expand Grid.

Page 105: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Drilling 105

3 Select Drilling.

4 In the Keep parent while drilling drop-down list, select Yes.

5 Click OK.

Page 106: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

106 Page-by © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Page-by

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Explain the purpose of page-by. Use page-by to segment data on a report in MicroStrategy Desktop.

What Is Page-by?

Page-by enables you to select and display subsets of your report results as separate pages. This feature is most useful when you have extremely long report results and scrolling is necessary to see all of the data.

Suppose you have the following report showing Revenue and Profit data organized by Region and Quarter. Notice that only the first few result rows are shown below:

Quarterly Region Revenue and Profit Report

Page 107: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Page-by 107

You can page by Quarter to see only one quarter’s worth of data at a time:

Page-by Quarter

You can page by any of the following objects:

• Attributes

• Metrics

• Hierarchies

• Consolidations

• Custom groups

• Object prompt (attribute)

• Object prompt (metric)—only if the row or column does not contain a metric

• Object prompt (hierarchy)

• Object prompt (consolidation)

• Object prompt (custom group)

Page 108: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

108 Page-by © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Methods for Creating Page-by Fields

To create page-by fields on a report:

1 Run a report.

2 On the toolbar, click View Page-by.

View Page-by

3 Drag and drop the object you want to page by into the page fields pane that appears above the report results.

You can place more than one object in the page fields pane.

4 Use the drop-down list to select the specific data you want to see on the report.

5 In the report, on the File menu, select Save to save your page-by field selections to the report definition.

Page Field Ordering

You can put more than one attribute into the page fields pane. The order of the attributes in the pane can influence the list of attribute elements displayed for subsequent attributes in the pane.

Suppose a retailer sells sporting goods in the United States. Some items are available only in certain stores and not in others. For example, the stores in Alaska sell snowshoes instead of surfboards, whereas the stores in Hawaii sell surfboards instead of snowshoes. In a report with State and Item in the page fields pane, the following results are possible:

Page 109: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Page-by 109

• State first, then Item—If Alaska is selected for State, the list of attribute elements for Item does not include surfboards. Similarly, if Hawaii is selected for State, the list of attribute elements for Item does not include snowshoes.

• Item first, then State—If snowshoes is selected for Item, the list of attribute elements for State does not include Hawaii. Similarly, if surfboards is selected for Item, the list of attribute elements for State does not include Alaska.

Page 110: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

110 Data Pivoting © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Data Pivoting

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Explain the purpose of data pivoting. Pivot data on a report in MicroStrategy Desktop by changing the order of objects in the rows or columns and moving objects between the rows and columns.

Data pivoting enables you to rearrange the columns and rows in a report, so you can view data from different perspectives. With data pivoting, you can do the following:

• Move objects from the row header to the column header

• Move objects from the column header to the row header

• Change the order of objects in the row header

• Change the order of objects in the column header

• Move objects from the row header or the column header to the page field pane

• Move objects from the page field pane to the row header or the column header

• Swap row headers and column headers

Methods for Data Pivoting

You can pivot data in a report using any of the following methods:

• Drag and drop objects to move them around on the template.

• Select an object, and choose a data pivoting option from the Move menu.

• Right-click an object, point to Move, and select an option from the menu.

Page 111: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Data Pivoting 111

• Select an object and use one of the data pivoting buttons 0n the toolbar:

Depending on the current position of your selected object, some data pivoting options may not be available.

Remember to save your report with the new locations of the objects.

Data Pivoting Buttons

Name Button Description

Swap Rows and Columns

Moves the data from the columns to the rows, and from the rows to the columns

Move to Row

Moves the selected object to the rows

Move to Column

Moves the selected object to the columns

Move to Page

Moves the selected object to the page-by field

Move Up Moves the selected object up

Move Down Moves the selected object down

Move Left Moves the selected object left

Move Right Moves the selected object right

Remove from Grid

Removes the selected object from the report template.

Page 112: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

112 Subtotals © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Subtotals

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Apply subtotals to a report in MicroStrategy Desktop.

Subtotals reflect accumulations at selected attribute levels and can be applied dynamically to any report. There are various subtotals available to you such as count, minimum, maximum, average, and so forth.

To display subtotals on a report:

1 Run a report.

2 On the Data menu, select Subtotals.

3 In the Subtotals window, on the Definition tab, select the subtotals you want to see on your report, as shown below:

Subtotal Window

Page 113: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Subtotals 113

4 Click OK.

5 In the report, on the File menu, select Save to save the subtotals to the report definition.

Subtotals by Position

Consider a report with four attributes. If you show subtotals for all four attributes, the report may be confusing, especially if you choose to display several types of subtotals. Therefore, you may want to suppress all subtotals except for a grand total, as shown below:

Subtotals by Position

If you want to see only grand totals:

1 Run a report.

2 On the Data menu, select Subtotals.

3 In the Subtotals window, on the Definition tab, select the subtotals you want to see on your report.

Page 114: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

114 Subtotals © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

4 Click Advanced.

5 In the Advanced Subtotals Options window, under Applied levels, select By position.

6 From the appropriate drop-down lists (based on where your metrics are on the template), select Grand Total.

7 Click OK to close the Advanced Subtotals Options window.

8 Click OK again to close the Subtotals window.

9 In the report, on the File menu, select Save to save the subtotals to the report definition.

Subtotals Across Levels

If there are several attributes on the report, subtotals can be turned on for selected attributes only. For example, compare the following two reports. The first report shows subtotals across Category only, as shown below:

Subtotals Across Category

Page 115: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Subtotals 115

The second report shows subtotals across Quarter only, as shown below:

Subtotals Across Quarter

This functionality gives you more control over the display of subtotals on your report.

To display subtotals for selected attributes:

1 Run a report with more than one attribute on its template.

2 On the Data menu, select Subtotals.

3 In the Subtotals window, on the Definition tab, select the subtotals you want to see on your report.

4 Click Advanced.

5 In the Advanced Subtotals Options window, under Applied levels, click Across level.

Page 116: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

116 Subtotals © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

6 Select the attributes across which you want to display subtotals.

7 Click OK to close the Advanced Subtotals Options window.

8 Click OK again to close the Subtotals window.

9 In the report, on the File menu, select Save to save the subtotals to the report definition.

Subtotals Group By

Subtotals are typically accumulations of metrics based on the layout of attributes on a report. However, subtotals may be grouped by any attribute on a report regardless of the report layout. For example, compare the following two reports. The first report shows subtotals across quarters. The Quarter subtotal is broken down by Manager because the Manager attribute is listed to the left of the Quarter attribute, as shown below:

Subtotals By Manager

Page 117: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Subtotals 117

The second report uses the subtotals group by functionality and displays subtotals for each Quarter, regardless of the Manager:

Subtotals Group By

The subtotal group by functionality gives you more flexibility in deciding exactly which subtotal to display on a report.

To display subtotals based on specific attribute groups:

1 Run a report with more than one attribute on its template.

2 On the Data menu, select Subtotals.

3 In the Subtotals window, on the Definition tab, select the subtotals you want to see on your report.

4 Click Advanced.

5 In the Advanced Subtotals Options window, under Applied levels, click Group by.

6 Click Add.

7 Select the attributes on which you would like to group subtotals.

8 Click OK to close the Group By Selection window.

Page 118: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

118 Subtotals © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

9 Click OK to close the Advanced Subtotals Options window.

10 Click OK again to close the Subtotals window.

11 In the report, on the File menu, select Save to save the subtotals to the report definition.

Page 119: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Sorting 119

Sorting

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Sort data in a report in MicroStrategy Desktop using a quick sort or an advanced sort.

Sorting enables you to specify the order in which the data in a report for a particular row or column is presented—either ascending or descending. You can sort based on any object that you place on the template. You can also select the sorting criteria and the sorting order.

Methods for Sorting

You have two options for sorting in MicroStrategy Desktop:

• Quick sort—Enables you to select one column or row and sort it in either ascending or descending order based on the data displayed. This option is only available in grid view.

• Advanced sort—Enables you to create more advanced sorts for rows, columns, and pages and to sort by multiple objects. This option is available in grid, graph, and grid and graph view.

Quick Sort

The first thing you must do to perform a quick sort is to run a report. Then select the row or column header by which you want to sort the report. You can then sort in the following ways:

• Right-click the column or row header and select Sort rows by this column (or just Sort if you right-clicked a row header), followed by either Ascending or Descending.

Page 120: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

120 Sorting © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• On the toolbar, select either Sort Ascending or Sort Descending:

If the toolbar buttons are not visible by default, on the View menu, click Toolbar and select Data.

You can only sort by one row or one column when using the quick sort method. If you sort by one column and then sort by another, you will lose the order for the first sort. Advanced sorting lets you sort by multiple rows and columns.

Advanced Sort

The advanced sort enables you to configure multiple sorts. You can select the attributes or metrics you want to use to sort the report and the order in which you want to sort by them. For attributes, you can also choose the attribute form (for example, ID or description) by which to sort the attribute data.

Every sort has the following fields that you can change to create completely customized sorting criteria:

Sorting Buttons

Name Button Description

Sort Ascending

Sorts the data in ascending order

Sort Descending

Sorts the data in descending order

Sort Columns

Column Description

Sort By Name of the row or column or page-by field

Criteria If you are sorting on an attribute, you can choose the attribute form by which to sort the attribute data. The attribute form does not have to be displayed on the report.

Page 121: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Sorting 121

Included in the Advanced Sort window is an option for hierarchical sorting of totals. When sorting on a metric, you can select the Sort metrics hierarchically using check box and select a subtotal. Data is still grouped, but the groups are sorted by the subtotal you select. Without this option, subtotals are treated as normal metric values and are often separated from the data to which they correspond.

The option to sort metrics hierarchically is only enabled when subtotals exist on the report. For more information on totals, see “Outline Mode” starting on page 125.

Order Order in which to sort the data, ascending or descending.

Total Position

This option enables you to determine where totals are displayed. The options are as follows:

Bottom: All totals are displayed together at the bottom of the report. For example, on a report with Year, Quarter, and Revenue, all Yearly and Quarterly totals appear at the bottom of the report.

Top: All totals and subtotals are displayed together at the top of the report. For example, on a report with Year, Quarter, and Revenue, all Yearly and Quarterly totals appear at the top of the report.

Inherit: Totals are displayed at the position set by the Report Designer using the subtotals display options.

Mixed: Totals are displayed in a sorted order like any other metric value. The values of the metric and the subtotal are mixed while performing the sorting.

Parent Position

This option is only available for custom groups. This option enables you to govern where the custom group header label appears with respect to its data elements.

Sort Columns

Column Description

Page 122: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

122 Sorting © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To create advanced sorts:

1 In a report, on the Data menu, select Advanced Sorting.

2 In the Sorting window, click the appropriate tab, Rows, Columns, or Pages, depending on what you want to sort, as shown below:

Sorting Window

3 Click Add to add a new sort.

4 In the Currently defined sorts window, under Currently defined sorts, change the values for Sort By, Criteria, Order, Total Position, and Parent Position as appropriate.

If you are sorting a metric row or column and subtotals exist on your report, you have the option of sorting hierarchically by subtotals.

Select the Sort metrics hierarchically using check box.

In the drop-down list, select the subtotal by which you want to sort.

5 Add additional sorts as necessary.

Page 123: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Sorting 123

6 Use the up and down arrows to change the order of the sorts as necessary.

7 Click OK to apply the sorts.

8 In the report, from the File menu, select Save to save the sorts to the report definition.

Sorting on Page-by

Within the Advanced Sorting options, you can now sort the page-by elements (ascending or descending) based on either their ID or description. The image below shows the Pages tab of the Sorting window:

Sorting on Page-by

Page 124: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

124 Sorting © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

For example, if you have a report with the Year attribute in the page-by field, you can set the elements of the year to be displayed in ascending or descending order. The image below shows Year attribute elements sorted in descending order:

Page-by on Year Attribute

To sort on page-by:

1 In the Sorting window, click the Pages tab.

2 Click Add.

3 At a minimum, specify the following columns: Sort By, Criteria and Order.

4 Click OK.

Page 125: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Outline Mode 125

Outline Mode

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Explain the purpose of outline mode. Display a report in outline mode in MicroStrategy Desktop.

Outline mode enables indented grouping of related attributes, much like heading levels in a document outline. Outline mode is useful when users want to display the same report at different levels very quickly. Review the following example:

Product Revenue Report Without Outline Mode

Page 126: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

126 Outline Mode © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

The same report displayed in outline mode looks much better, as shown below:

Product Revenue Report With Outline Mode

Expanding and collapsing the different levels of the report does not execute any SQL against the data warehouse. In addition, the report can be cached, which also makes it faster than drilling to another attribute level.

Outline mode is only available when you have more than one object in the rows of the report template.

Using Outline Mode

To turn on outline mode, do one of the following:

• On the Grid menu, select Display Outline Results.

• On the toolbar, click Display Outline Results.

Display Outline Results

Page 127: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Outline Mode 127

You can expand and collapse levels by clicking the numbered buttons above the report. There will be one button for each column in the report. See the three reports below for an example of how clicking these buttons can affect the look of a report in outline mode. The initial report is shown below:

All Levels Displayed

When you click the “2” button, the information is rolled up as follows:

Category and Subcategory Revenue Displayed Only

Page 128: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

128 Outline Mode © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To see data totals for a collapsed level, you must enable subtotals. For more information on subtotals, see “Subtotals” starting on page 112.

Finally, when you click the “1” button, the information is completely rolled up as follows:

Category Revenue Only

By default, reports in outline mode are displayed with all levels expanded. However, there is a setting that enables you to specify how you want the report to initially display.

To set an outline mode report to initially display with all levels collapsed:

1 Open a report in Grid view.

2 On the Grid menu, select Options.

3 In the Grid Options window, on the General tab, select Open with all outline levels collapsed.

You also have the option to have an outline mode report open and expanded to a specific level.

4 Click OK to close the Grid Options window.

5 In the report, on the File menu, select Save to save the grid options to the report definition.

Page 129: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Printing 129

Printing

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Print a boardroom quality report.

You can print a report in grid, graph, grid and graph, or SQL view. The formatting you apply to the report in MicroStrategy Desktop also applies to the printed copy of the report.

You can print a report using one of the following methods:

• On the File menu, select Print.

• On the toolbar, click Print Preview.

Print Preview

Clicking Print Preview opens the Print Preview window for your report, as shown below:

Print Preview Window

Page 130: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

130 Printing © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

In the Print Preview window, click Setup to open the Page Setup window, which enables you to:

• Change the page orientation, page numbering, and scaling

• Adjust the page margins

• Determine what information to display in the header and footer of the printed report. You can choose to display page number, total number of pages, date, time, project name, report name, template name, filter name, report details, bitmap images, and user ID.

• Choose the order in which to print pages if the report is particularly long or has numerous page fields.

Remember to save your report with its new print options.

Page 131: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exporting and E-mailing Reports 131

Exporting and E-mailing Reports

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Export a report from MicroStrategy Desktop to another application. Format and e-mail reports as attachments.

You can export a MicroStrategy Desktop report or e-mail a MicroStrategy Desktop report (as an attachment) in any of the following application formats:

• Microsoft Excel®

• Microsoft Word®

• Microsoft Access®

• Plain text

• HTML

• PDF

To export a report:

1 Run a report.

2 On the Data menu, point to Export To, and select the application format in which you want to see the report results.

You can manipulate the behavior of the export function using export options.

To access export options:

1 Run a report.

2 On the Data menu, select Export Options.

Page 132: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

132 Exporting and E-mailing Reports © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

3 In the Export Options window, in the Application drop-down list, select the application to which you are exporting.

4 On the General tab, change the settings as appropriate.

The settings available on the General tab vary depending on your selection for the Application list.

5 On the Appearance tab, change the settings to alter the appearance of the exported report.

6 Click OK to exit the Export Options window.

7 In the report, on the File menu, select Save to save the export options to the report definition.

To e-mail a report as an attachment:

1 Run a report.

2 On the File menu, point to E-mail report as, and select the application format that you want to use to e-mail the report as an attachment.

After you select the attachment type, an e-mail message window opens with the report file as an attachment. Depending on the size of the report, this action may take a few moments.

3 Continue composing the e-mail as desired.

Removing Metrics Columns

Users can prevent the "Metrics" column title from displaying within a report when viewing the report results in MicroStrategy Web or when exporting the report results to PDF and HTML in MicroStrategy Desktop. The option is set within MicroStrategy Desktop, but the column is only hidden when viewing the report in MicroStrategy Web.

Page 133: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exporting and E-mailing Reports 133

To remove the metric column title:

1 Create a new report or use an existing report.

2 In Design View, on the Grid menu, select Options.

OR

In Grid View, on the Grid menu, select Options.

3 Select the Columns and Rows tab.

4 In the Columns and Rows tab, under Columns, select the Remove extra column (Web only) check box, as shown below:

Grid Options Window

5 Click OK.

6 Save and Close the report.

You will be able to see this change when viewing the report in MicroStrategy Web or when you view the exported report in PDF or HTML.

Page 134: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

134 Report Subscription in Desktop © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Report Subscription in Desktop

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Deliver reports to the history list, update caches, and mobile devices.

In Desktop, you can subscribe reports and documents to history list, cache and mobile.

Subscribing a Report to the History List

You can subscribe a report or document to the history list from the right-click menu or from the Report Editor.

To receive a report or document in the history list, you must subscribe to that report or document. You can use the History List Subscription Editor to set the subscription properties and schedule.

To subscribe a report to the History List:

1 Right-click the report, point to Schedule Delivery To, and select History List, as shown below:

Subscribing a Report to the History List

Page 135: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Report Subscription in Desktop 135

2 Select a schedule and appropriate options and click OK. The different options are depicted below:

History List Subscription Editor

To unsubscribe a report from the History List:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the Tools menu, select My Subscriptions.

2 In the My Subscriptions window, right-click the subscription, and select Unsubscribe.

Page 136: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

136 Report Subscription in Desktop © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Subscribing a Report to Update Cache

The updating cache option refreshes the existing cache for the selected report with new data from the data warehouse. You can schedule a delivery to update cache without having to execute the report.The option to schedule to update cache is depicted below:

Subscribing a Report to Update Cache

To update the cache of a report or document, you must subscribe to that report or document. You can use the Cache Update Subscription Editor to subscribe to this update, as shown below:

Cache Update Subscription Editor

You can subscribe to update cache in the same way as subscribing reports or documents to the history list.

Page 137: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Report Subscription in Desktop 137

Subscribing a Report to a Mobile Device

You can create a subscription to send a report or document to a mobile device. To receive a report or document on a mobile device, you must subscribe yourself to that report or document. The option to schedule delivery to a mobile device is depicted below:

Subscribing a Report to a Mobile Device

Mobile users must have the use MicroStrategy Mobile and Mobile View Document privileges.

Page 138: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

138 Report Subscription in Desktop © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Within the Mobile Subscription Editor, you can specify your desired schedule. This schedule controls how often the report or document is sent, and when you want this subscription to end, as depicted below:

Mobile Subscription Editor

You can subscribe to a mobile device in the same way as subscribing reports or documents to the history list.

Page 139: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding Notes to Reports and Documents 139

Adding Notes to Reports and Documents

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

View and add notes to reports and documents.

You can actively collaborate online with other MicroStrategy Desktop users using a powerful feature—notes. You can think of notes as annotations or comments attached to a report or a document, which enable you to communicate important information about the report to the end users. For example, you can educate users how to navigate through report results, find optimal drill paths, interpret thresholds, and so on. End users, on the other hand, can share their feedback by adding comments about the usability of the design or the relevance of metrics.

Notes are linked to the report and document definition, but are not saved with it. When you add, modify, or delete notes, you do not invalidate the report or document cache.

The image below displays the Notes window:

Notes Window

Page 140: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

140 Adding Notes to Reports and Documents © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To view notes:

1 In Design View or Grid View, on the toolbar, click Notes, as shown below:

Notes Button

OR

In Design View or Grid View, on the View menu, select Notes.

To add notes:

1 In Design View or Grid View, on the toolbar, click Notes.

OR

In Design View or Grid View, on the View menu, select Notes.

Page 141: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Adding Notes to Reports and Documents 141

2 Type your desired note in the lower text box, as shown below:

Adding Notes

3 Click Submit.

4 Click Close.

Your note will be added to the notes summary pane.

To modify notes:

1 In the Notes window, click Edit.

2 Edit the notes in the window.

3 Click OK to save your changes.

Page 142: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

142 Part II - Style Manipulation © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Part II - Style Manipulation

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Describe and perform report manipulations in MicroStrategy Desktop that enable you to change the formatting of report data.

This section covers report manipulations that enable you to determine how report data is formatted. You can change the look and feel of a report in MicroStrategy Desktop using various formatting methods.

Page 143: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Formatting 143

Formatting

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Make formatting changes to reports in MicroStrategy Desktop. Create, save, and use autostyles.

Formatting involves changing the display of a report. You can format the look and feel of your report by altering the number display, alignment, font, border, and patterns for column and row axes, template object headers and values, and subtotal headers and values.

Methods for Formatting

There are three ways to change the formatting properties on a report:

If the formatting toolbar is not visible by default, on the View menu, click Toolbar and select Formatting.

• You can right-click any object on your template and select Formatting. You can also right-click the word Metrics to format all of the metrics on the report in the same way. The Format Cells window opens for you to make formatting changes. For example, if you run a report with Category on the template, and you right-click the Category header, you would see the following formatting options:

Formatting Options

Page 144: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

144 Formatting © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• You can use the Formatting toolbar to select the objects you want to format and to make formatting changes:

Formatting Toolbar

Not all of the formatting options appear in the Formatting toolbar pictured above.

• You can use the Format menu to select the objects you want to format using the menu shown below:

Format Menu

The Format Cells window opens for you to make formatting changes.

To format objects on a report:

1 Right-click an object on the report, point to Formatting, and select the part of the object you want to format (for example, headers, values, and so forth).

You can also use the Formatting toolbar or the Format menu to select the object you want to format. If you are using the Formatting toolbar, you use the drop-down lists and buttons on the toolbar to select the object and to make your formatting changes.

Page 145: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Formatting 145

2 In the Format Cells window, make your formatting changes, as shown below:

Formatting Window

3 Click OK.

Remember to save the report with its new formatting.

You can also use the Find and Replace tool to modify the format of sets of metrics throughout a MicroStrategy project. For more information on the Find and Replace tool, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

Page 146: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

146 Formatting © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Autostyles

As mentioned in the Reports in Desktop lesson, you can format a report simply by selecting an autostyle. MicroStrategy comes with several autostyles that contain predefined formatting properties.

To use an existing autostyle:

1 Run a report in grid mode.

2 On the Grid menu, point to Auto Style Selected, and select an autostyle.

3 On the File menu, select Save to save the report with its new autostyle.

You can also use the Find and Replace tool to apply an autostyle to a selected set of reports and templates throughout a MicroStrategy project. For more information on the Find and Replace tool, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

You can also choose to customize the formatting for a report and save those formatting changes as your own autostyle, which you can reuse on other reports.

To create and save your own autostyle:

1 Run any report in grid mode and customize the formatting using any of the methods discussed in the previous section.

2 On the Grid menu, select Save AutoStyle As.

3 In the Save AutoStyle As window, select a location and name your autostyle.

Page 147: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Formatting 147

The default save location for a custom autostyle is My Objects. If you save an autostyle to this folder, it will appear in only your autostyle drop-down list. However, if you would like this autostyle to be available to other users, you should save the autostyle in the Autostyles folder under Public Objects.

4 Click Save.

To define a project default autostyle:

The following steps configure all new reports created in a MicroStrategy project to use a specific autostyle by default.

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop while logged in to a MicroStrategy project, from the Tools menu, select My Preferences.

2 In the My Preferences window, in the Categories list, expand Grid and select General.

3 In the Grid - General pane, under Display, in the Default style drop-down list, select the autostyle that you would like to make the project default.

4 Click OK to exit the My Preferences window.

Page 148: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

148 Thresholds © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Thresholds

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Explain the purpose of thresholds and apply thresholds to a report in MicroStrategy Desktop.

A threshold is best understood as conditional formatting of metric values. By defining thresholds for a metric, report developers can format metric values that meet the criteria of their choosing. For example, suppose a sales quota for monthly sales is $10,000 per employee. A report developer creates a monthly sales by employee report in which all sales values above the $10,000 quota appear in green and all those below appear in red. Furthermore, the metric value can be replaced with an image, a symbol, or alternate text. This example illustrates the purpose of thresholds, which is to emphasize data that meets defined criteria, making reports easier to read.

For example, the image below shows all the categories that generated revenue greater than $1,000,000 with a green background:

Report with Thresholds

Thresholds are also applied to the Profit and Profit Margin metrics.

Page 149: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Thresholds 149

The Thresholds Editor is shown below:

Threshold Editor

You can copy and paste threshold definitions, which enables you to save time by reusing them when the same definition is needed to define thresholds on multiple metrics. You are also provided four shortcut thresholds. These shortcut thresholds include highest and lowest rank and percentage.

To create and apply a threshold to a grid report:

1 Run a report.

2 On the Data menu, select Thresholds.

OR

Right-click the appropriate metric and select Thresholds.

OR

On the toolbar, click Thresholds.

If the Threshold icon is not visible by default, on the View menu, click Toolbar and select Data.

Page 150: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

150 Thresholds © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

3 In the Thresholds Editor, on the toolbar, in the drop-down list, select the metric to which you want to apply the threshold, as shown below:

Thresholds Editor

After you create a threshold for one metric, you can easily copy it to multiple metrics on the report.

4 Select the New Threshold check box to ensure your threshold is enabled.

5 In the text box, type a name for the threshold.

6 Select Click here to start a new qualification. The parts of the condition are displayed, each of which must be defined:

• Click Field to select the attribute or metric that is part of your condition.

• Click Operator to select an operator, such as In List, Not in List, or Where.

• Click Value to specify the elements from the available list.

7 In the Format drop-down list select one of the following options:

• Format—Select this option to change fonts, colors, styles, sizes, and so on. This formats the values that meet your threshold condition.

Page 151: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Thresholds 151

• Replace Text—Select this option to define your own text. This replaces the value that meets your threshold condition with text. Type the text in the empty text field. The text should be limited to 255 characters.

• Image—Select this option to replace the value that meets your threshold condition with an image file.

Threshold images cannot be viewed in MicroStrategy Desktop. To see threshold images you have added to a report, view the report in MicroStrategy Web. Threshold images are also visible if the report is placed in an HTML document or Report Services document.

• Quick Symbol—Select this option to replace the value that meets your threshold condition with a symbol, as shown below:

Threshold Editor

8 Define the following:

• Format or Replace Text—If you selected Format or Replace Text, on the toolbar, click Edit the threshold formatting to define the number format, font for the text or data, text alignment within the cell, cell border, and cell pattern.

• Image—If you selected Image, in the Absolute path box, click browse to provide the location of the image.

Page 152: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

152 Thresholds © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• Quick Symbol—If you selected Quick Symbol, select a symbol from the right. On the toolbar, click Edit the threshold formatting to define the alignment, size and color (font), cell border, cell background, and cell pattern for the symbol you have chosen.

9 In the Thresholds Editor toolbar, select one of the Subtotal options to specify whether the threshold should be applied to the metric, any subtotals that may be on the report, or both:

• Apply the threshold on metric values only—Applies the threshold condition only on metric values.

• Apply the threshold on subtotal values only—Applies the threshold condition only on the subtotal values.

• Apply the threshold on metric and subtotal values—Applies the threshold condition on metric and subtotal values.

10 Click OK to save your new threshold definition.

After you run your report you can toggle between the symbol and value using the F12 function key or, on the Data menu, select Hide Threshold or Show Threshold.

Page 153: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Thresholds 153

Copying a threshold across multiple metrics

You can use copy and paste functionality to quickly add the same threshold definition to multiple metrics in a report. You can edit the thresholds as necessary for any of the metrics.

When you edit a threshold, it does not effect the copied ones.

To copy a threshold:

1 In the Thresholds editor, select the threshold to copy and, on the toolbar, click Copy.

Copy

2 On the toolbar, in the drop-down list, select the metric to copy the threshold to.

3 On the toolbar, click Paste.

Paste

Page 154: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

154 Thresholds © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

The threshold is copied to that metric. By default, the copied threshold is named "Copy of [original threshold’s name]", as shown below:

Threshold Editor

To rename it, click the threshold name and type the new name.

4 Edit the threshold, if necessary.

5 Click OK to save the threshold and return to the report.

Page 155: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Banding 155

Banding

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Explain the purpose of banding and apply custom banding to a report in MicroStrategy Desktop.

Banding is a method of organizing the appearance of report results in a grid report according to certain criteria. You can band by rows and columns based on either the number of rows or columns or the values of the row and column headers.

The autostyle of a report defines its default banding options, but you can turn off banding or define custom banding for a report regardless of its autostyle.

To turn off banding:

1 Run a report in Grid view.

2 On the Grid menu, select Options.

3 In the Grid Options window, on the General tab, under Banding, select No banding.

To define custom banding:

1 Run a report in Grid view.

2 On the Grid menu, select Options.

3 In the Grid Options window, on the General tab, under Banding, select Custom banding.

4 Click Settings.

Page 156: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

156 Banding © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

5 In the Banding Settings window, set the banding options as desired, as shown below:

Banding Settings Window

6 Click OK to close the Banding Settings window.

7 Click OK again to close the Grid Options window.

8 In the report, on the File menu, click Save to save your banding options to the report definition.

Page 157: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Banding 157

In the following example, custom banding was applied at the Subcategory level:

Custom Banding at Subcategory Level

Page 158: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

158 Locking and Resizing Columns and Rows © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Locking and Resizing Columns and Rows

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Lock row and column headers and resize columns in MicroStrategy Desktop.

MicroStrategy Desktop enables you to lock row and column headers on a grid report, so while viewing report results, you can scroll horizontally and vertically without losing sight of the row or column headers. This property is particularly advantageous when you want to view information that spans more rows or columns than can be displayed at one time.

To lock row and column headers:

1 Run a report in Grid view.

2 On the Grid menu, select Lock Row Headers or Lock Column Headers as needed. These options lock the rows and columns of a grid report, respectively.

To unlock the row or column headers, from the Grid menu, select the Lock Row Headers or Lock Column Headers option again.

You also have the option to manually resize the column widths and row heights of a report.

To manually resize column widths using column handles:

1 Run a report in Grid view.

2 On the Grid menu, select View Column Handles.

3 Click and drag the column handles to the desired width.

To remove the column handles from the grid report, select View Column Handles again.

Page 159: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Locking and Resizing Columns and Rows 159

To resize column widths using the Grid Options window:

1 Run a report in Grid view.

2 On the Grid menu, select Options.

3 In the Grid Options window, click the Columns and Rows tab.

4 Under Columns, click Auto Fit and specify a minimum column width in characters.

OR

Under Columns, click Fixed, and from the Select from the list drop-down list, select which columns you want to configure. Also, specify a column width in pixels.

If the data in each column is much shorter in length than the column headers, you may want to select the Wordwrap check box. Look at the two versions of the same report below to see effect of the wordwrap feature. The first report has the wordwrap feature enabled, so the metric names wrap:

Wordwrap Feature Enabled

Page 160: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

160 Locking and Resizing Columns and Rows © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

The second report does not have the wordwrap feature enabled, so the metric names make the columns much wider:

Wordwrap Feature Not Enabled

5 Click OK to close the Grid Options window.

6 In the report, on the File menu, click Save to save your column width options to the report definition.

To resize row heights using the Grid Options window:

1 Run a report in Grid view.

2 On the Grid menu, select Options.

3 In the Grid Options window, click the Columns and Rows tab.

4 Under Rows, click Auto Row Height.

OR

Under Rows, click Fixed Row Height and specify a row height in pixels.

5 Click OK to close the Grid Options window.

6 In the report, from the File menu, click Save to save your row height options to the report definition.

Page 161: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Graph Properties 161

Graph Properties

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Describe some of the basic graph properties and modify a graph report in MicroStrategy Desktop.

There are numerous graph properties that enable you to customize nearly every aspect of a graph’s appearance. You can choose from dozens of different graph types and styles. After you choose an overall graph type and graph style, other options enable you to adjust various aspects of the graph, such as the data labels, a legend, its axes, and its titles. This topic describes a few of the more common graph properties you may use.

Display Data Labels

You can display the exact values for each data point on a graph.

To display data labels on a graph:

1 Run a report in Graph view.

2 On the Graph menu, point to Display, and select Data Label.

The data labels are automatically formatted based on the formatting of the metrics in grid view (as long as all of the metrics are formatted in the same manner). However, you can also manually set the format of the data labels.

Page 162: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

162 Graph Properties © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To manually format the data labels (and axes numbers) on a graph:

The automatic formatting of data labels on a graph is the default behavior. If, however, you manually format the data labels, automatic number formatting no longer takes place.

1 Run a report in Graph view.

2 On the Graph menu, select Graph Options.

3 In the Preferences window, in the Properties categories list, expand Axes, followed by Category, and select Axis Labels. This is shown below:

Preferences Window

4 In the Category - Axis Labels pane, select the positioning of the labels in the graph.

5 In the Properties categories list, expand Axis Labels, and select Axis Line to format the axis line.

6 Click Font to format the axis label font.

Page 163: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Graph Properties 163

7 In the Properties categories list, expand Axes, followed by Y, followed by Axis Labels, and select Number Formatting to format the axis numbers.

8 In the Axis Labels - Number Formatting pane, under the Category list, select the type of formatting you want to apply.

9 Click OK to close the Preferences window.

10 In the graph report, on the File menu, select Save to save the data label format to the report definition.

Graph Title

By default, the title of a graph is the name of the report, but you can manually change the title using static text or graph title variables. A graph title can also be reformatted.

To change the title of a graph:

1 Run a report in Graph view.

2 On the Graph menu, select Titles and Labels.

3 In the Preferences window, in the Categories list, expand Titles and select All.

Page 164: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

164 Graph Properties © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

4 In the Titles - All pane, in the Title box, type the title for the graph, as shown below:

Change Graph TItle

To change the formatting of a graph title:

1 Run a report in Graph view.

2 On the Graph menu, select Preferences.

3 In the Preferences window, in the Properties Categories list, expand Titles, followed by All, and select Font.

4 In the All - Font pane, make the appropriate changes to format the title font and frame.

5 In the Box style drop-down list, select an item other than None if you want to format the title fill.

6 In the Properties Categories list, under All, click Fill. Make the appropriate changes to format the title fill.

7 In the Properties Categories list, under All, click Border. Make the appropriate changes to format the title border.

Page 165: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Graph Properties 165

8 In the Preferences window, click Apply and then click OK.

9 In the graph report, on the File menu, select Save to save the new graph title format to the report definition.

You can also use the Find and Replace tool to apply a font of your choice to graph titles and labels in selected sets of reports and templates throughout a MicroStrategy project. For more information on the Find and Replace tool, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

Specify the Number of Categories and Series

Sometimes, all of the data from a report does not fit onto one page of a graph. When that happens, a scroll bar appears on the bottom of the graph to enable you to scroll through the rest of the data. An alternative to scrolling is to change the number of series and categories on the graph in order to display more or less data per page.

The following report shows 4 categories (sets of data along the X-axis) and 2 series (legend items). Generally, the categories correspond to the rows or a report, and the series correspond to the columns of a report, as shown below:

Graph Categories and Series

Page 166: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

166 Graph Properties © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To change the number of categories and series of a graph:

1 Run a report in Graph view.

2 On the Graph menu, select Preferences.

3 In the Preferences window, in the Properties Categories list, under Options, select General.

4 In the Options - General pane, under Scrolling, specify the Maximum number of categories and the Maximum number of series, as shown below:

Setting for Maximum Number of Categories and Series

To use the number of categories specified in Maximum number of categories as the minimum number of categories to display, select the Use as minimum number of categories check box.

5 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Preferences window.

6 In the graph report, on the File menu, select Save to save the graph preferences to the report definition.

Page 167: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Graph Properties 167

Nested Labels

When there are several attributes in the rows of a report, all of the attributes are displayed in each label on the category axis, resulting in a cluttered look, as shown below:

Graph with Many Attributes in Legend

A feature called nested labels is available in the Preferences window, and when enabled, it minimizes the amount of text that displays along the category axis. The image below shows the same graph with the nested labels feature enabled:

Nested Labels

In addition, when you enable nested labels, you can also draw brackets for each attribute level for added effect, as shown below:

Nested Labels with Brackets

To enable nested labels on a graph:

1 Run a report in Graph view.

2 On the Graph menu, select Preferences.

Page 168: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

168 Graph Properties © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

3 In the Preferences window, in the Properties Categories list, under Options, select General.

4 In the Options - General pane, under Graph Labels, select the Use nested labels check box, as shown below:

Use Nested Labels Option

To include brackets for each attribute level in the nested label, select the Draw bracket for each level check box.

5 To show or hide the individual labels of graphs that have several data series, select the Concatenate labels for multiple series check box.

This option only works for graphs that require multiple data for one data point, such as bubble, scatter, and stock graphs.

6 To show or hide the last level labels of graphs that have several data series, select the Suppress last level labels check box. This option applies to all data series in the graph.

This option is useful for graphs that require multiple data for one data point, such as bubble, scatter, and stock graphs.

Page 169: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Graph Properties 169

7 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Preferences window.

8 In the graph report, on the File menu, select Save to save the nested labels to the report definition.

Graph Undo/Redo

The undo function allows a user to easily reverse actions that resulted in an undesirable outcome on a graph. The redo function allows a user to reverse the undo command on a graph.

Both the redo and undo functions maintain a history list of the actual actions that can be reversed. The history list provides you with the option to reverse any action in the list, not just the last action. For example, assume you change the title, graph type, number of series, and number of categories on a graph. After looking at the final graph you decide that a different graph type would look better. You can undo only the graph type and do not have to also reverse all actions prior to the graph type in the history list.

To undo or redo the last action on a graph:

1 Run a report in Graph view.

2 On the Edit menu, select Undo or Redo.

To undo or redo a specific action on a graph:

1 In the graph report, on the toolbar, click the drop-down arrow on redo or undo.

2 Select the specific action to undo or redo from the list.

Once a graph is saved, the redo and undo history lists are erased. In addition, if a graph contains a page-by field, selecting a different page will erase the history lists.

Page 170: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

170 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Exercises: Report Manipulations

Part I - Data Manipulation

Drilling and Page-By

Overview

Create a report with Region and Category in the rows and Year and Revenue in the columns. The first few rows of the initial report should look like the following:

Page 171: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 171

After creating this report, modify it so that the data is displayed at a lower level and is slightly easier to read. The modified report will look like the following:

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In the Folder List, select your My Reports Exercises folder to work in it.

2 On the File menu, point to New, and select Report.

3 In the New Grid window, keep Blank Report selected and click OK.

4 In the Report Editor, in the Object Browser, double-click Geography.

5 Drag and drop Region to the rows of the template.

6 In the Object Browser, click up one level.

7 In the Object Browser, double-click Products.

Page 172: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

172 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

8 Drag and drop Category to the right of Region on the template.

Dragging and dropping objects to specific areas of a template takes practice. As an alternative, you can right-click an object in the Object Browser and select Add to Rows or Add to Columns to easily add objects to a template.

9 In the Object Browser, click up one level.

10 In the Object Browser, double-click Time.

11 Drag and drop Year to the columns of the template.

12 In the My Shortcuts, click the Metrics folder.

13 In the Object Browser, double-click the Sales Metrics folder.

14 Double-click Revenue to include it above Year, in the columns of the template.

15 Drag your Revenue metric below Year in the columns. Your template layout should look like the following:

16 Click Save and Close.

17 In the Save Report As window, navigate to your My Reports Exercises folder and save the report as Region, Category, Year Sales.

18 Locate the report you just created and double-click it to run it.

Page 173: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 173

19 On the Grid menu, select Merge Row Header Cells.

20 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

Currently, the report is at the Region, Category, and Year level. Manipulate this report to display Region, Subcategory, and Quarter for a greater level of detail.

21 On the report, double-click the Year header to drill down to Quarter.

Double-clicking automatically drills down one level.

Every time a drill occurs a new report window is created.

22 In the new report, right-click the Category header, point to Drill, point to Down, and then select Subcategory.

A new report window is created and displays data at the Subcategory level. The first few rows and columns of your results should now look like the following:

23 Right-click the Subcategory header, point to Move, and select To Page-by.

24 Select Quarter and drag it into the page-by field to the right of Subcategory.

25 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

Page 174: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

174 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

26 Click Save and Close.

27 In the Save Report As window, navigate to your My Reports Exercises folder and save the report as Region, Subcategory, Quarter Sales - Page By.

28 Close all other report windows without saving them.

Page 175: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 175

Pivoting and Sorting

Overview

Create a report with Region, Year, and Revenue on the template. The initial results should look like the following:

Use pivoting and advanced sorting to change the report display to look like the following:

Notice that the report is sorted ascending by Year and descending by Revenue within each year.

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Page 176: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

176 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Detailed Instructions

1 In the Folder List, select your My Reports Exercises folder to work in it.

2 On the File menu, point to New, and select Report.

3 In the New Grid window, keep Blank Report selected and click OK.

4 In the Report Editor, in the Object Browser, double-click Geography.

5 Drag and drop Region to the rows of the template.

6 In the Object Browser, click up one level.

7 In the Object Browser, double-click Time.

8 Drag and drop Year to the columns of the template.

9 In the My Shortcut, click the Metrics folder.

10 In the Object Browser, double-click the Sales Metrics folder.

11 Drag Revenue to include it below Year in the columns of the template.

12 In the Report Editor, click Run.

13 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

14 On the Grid menu, point to Auto Style Selected, and select the Squares autostyle.

15 Pivot Year from the columns to the rows by either dragging and dropping it to the left Region or by right-clicking Year, pointing to Move, and selecting To Rows.

Page 177: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 177

16 On the Data menu, select Advanced Sorting.

17 In the Sorting window, on the Rows tab, click Add to add the first object from the report to the Currently defined sorts window.

Under the Sort By column you should see Year, under the Criteria column you should see ID, under the Order column you should see Ascending. Leave these defaults.

18 Click Add again.

This adds the second object, Region, from the report, to the Currently defined sorts window.

19 In the Sort By column, click Region, and use the drop-down list to select Revenue.

20 In the Order column, select Descending. Leave the other defaults. Your Sorting window should now look like the following:

21 Click OK to close the Sorting window.

22 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

23 In the report, click Save and Close.

Page 178: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

178 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

24 In the Save Report As window, navigate to the My Reports Exercises folder and save the report as US Revenues by Region - Pivoting and Sorting.

Totals and Outline Mode

Overview

Run the Sales by Region report, which can be found by using the search functionality. You want to modify this report so you can see this same information at the Subcategory level when needed. You also want to modify the report so it displays subtotals.

Use the subtotals and outline mode functionality to change the report display to look like the following:

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In Desktop, on the Tools menu, select Search for Objects.

2 On the Name and Location tab, in the Named box, enter Sales by Region.

3 In the Look in box, browse to the \MicroStrategy Tutorial\Public Objects\Reports folder and click OK.

Page 179: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 179

4 Click Find Now. The search should look like the following:

5 In the Search Results window, double-click the Sales by Region report to run it.

6 For the Region selection prompt, leave the default prompt selections and click Next.

7 For the second Category selections prompt, leave the default selection of Electronics and add the Books, Movies, and Music categories by double-clicking each of them, and then click Next.

Page 180: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

180 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

8 In the Summary screen, review your selections and click Finish. The first few rows of the initial report look like the following:

For more information about prompted reports, see “What Is a Prompt?” starting on page 317.

9 In the report, on the View menu, select Design View.

10 In the Report Editor, in the template definition window, right-click the Year attribute and select Remove from Report. You will see the following message:

Be sure you select Remove from Report and not Remove from Grid.

11 In the MicroStrategy Desktop window, click Yes.

Page 181: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 181

12 In the template definition window, right-click the Region attribute and select Remove from Report.

13 Again, in the MicroStrategy Desktop window, click Yes.

Next, you want to enable subtotals.

14 In the Report Editor, on the Data menu, select Subtotals.

15 In the Subtotals window, on the Definition tab, select the Total check box.

16 Click Advanced.

17 In the Advanced Subtotals Options window, click Across level, and select both the Category and Subcategory check boxes.

18 Click OK to close the Advanced Subtotals Options window.

19 Click OK to close the Subtotals window.

20 In the Report Editor, on the View menu, select Grid View.

The first few rows of the report now look like the following:

Now, enable outline mode.

Page 182: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

182 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

21 In the report, on the Grid menu, select Display Outline Results. The first few rows of the report now look like the following:

When you run the report in the future, you want it to open in outline mode but collapsed to the Category level.

22 In the report, on the Grid menu, select Options.

23 In the Grid Options window, on the General tab, under Outline, click Open with all outline levels collapsed.

24 Click OK to close the Grid Options window.

25 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

26 In the report, on the File menu, select Save As.

27 In the Save Report As window, navigate to the My Reports Exercises folder and save the report as Sales by Category and Subcategory - Outline.

28 Click Save to close the Save Report As window.

29 In the Save Options window, click Static, so you are not prompted when you run this report again.

Page 183: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 183

For more information about the Save Options window, see “Saving Reports with Prompts” starting on page 352.

30 Click OK to close the Save Options window.

31 Close the Sales by Category and Subcategory - Outline report.

32 Close the New Search window. If prompted to save the search, select No.

Page 184: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

184 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Exporting Reports

Overview

Export the Employee Birthdays report (found in the Public Objects\Reports\Subject Areas\Human Resources Analysis folder) to Microsoft Excel so you can save it in your local machine. The first few rows of the exported report should look like the following:

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Page 185: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 185

Detailed Instructions

1 In the Folder List, expand the Public Objects folder, followed by the Reports folder, followed by the Subject Areas folder, and select the Human Resources Analysis folder.

2 In the Object Viewer, double-click the Employee Birthdays report to execute it.

3 In the report, on the Data menu, point to Export To, and select MS Excel.

You can specify pre-export and post-export Microsoft Excel macros, a destination file, and whether or not to include Report Details and the report SQL via Export Options. For more information on accessing Export Options, see “To access export options:” starting on page 131.

4 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

5 Close the Microsoft Excel workbook without saving it.

6 In MicroStrategy Desktop, close the Employee Birthdays report without saving it.

Page 186: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

186 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

E-mailing Reports

Overview

E-mail the Item and Order Tracking report (found in the Public Objects\Reports\Business Roles\Operations Managers folder) as a PDF attachment. The original report results should look like the following:

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

You will not be able to perform this exercise if an e-mail client is not configured on your local machine.

Detailed Instructions

1 In the Folder List, expand the Public Objects folder, followed by the Reports folder, followed by the Business Roles folder, and select the Operations Managers folder.

2 In the Object Viewer, double-click the Item and Order Tracking report to run it.

3 Accept all default prompt answers.

Page 187: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 187

4 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

5 In the report, on the File menu, point to E-mail report as, and select PDF document.

6 A new e-mail message opens with the Item and Order Tracking report as a PDF attachment. Close the e-mail message without saving it.

The default e-mail program set up on your local machine is used to create the e-mail message.

7 In MicroStrategy Desktop, close the Item and Order Tracking report without saving it.

Page 188: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

188 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Part II - Style Manipulation

Formatting and Autostyles

Overview

Change the formatting on your Region, Category, Year Sales report that you created earlier so that the first few rows look like following:

Save the formatting changes as a new autostyle, and reuse it on the Category Sales Report report.

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In the Folder List, select your My Reports Exercises folder.

Page 189: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 189

2 In the Object Viewer, double-click the report Region, Category, Year Sales to run it.

3 In the report, right-click the Region header, point to Formatting, followed by Row Axis, and select Headers.

4 In the Format Cells window, click the Font tab and make the following changes:

• Font: Garamond

• Size: 12

• Bold: Yes

• Color: Grey (25%)

5 Click the Background tab and in the Background style drop-down list, select Solid.

6 Click the Fill color drop-down list and select Dark Red.

Page 190: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

190 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

7 Click OK to close the Format Cells window.

8 In the report, right-click the Region header, point to Formatting, followed by Row Axis, and select Values.

9 In the Format Cells window, click the Font tab and make the following changes:

• Font: Garamond

• Color: Dark Red

10 Click OK to close the Format Cells window.

11 In the report, right-click the Year header, point to Formatting, followed by Column Axis, and select Headers.

12 In the Format Cells window, click the Font tab and make the following changes:

• Font: Garamond

• Size: 12

• Bold: Yes

• Color: Grey (25%)

13 Click the Background tab and from the Background style drop-down menu, select Solid.

14 Click the Fill color drop-down menu and select Dark Red.

15 Click OK to close the Format Cells window.

16 In the report, right-click the Year header, point to Formatting, followed by Column Axis, and select Values.

17 Repeat the formatting changes in steps 12 to 15.

18 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

19 In the report, from the Grid menu, select Save AutoStyle As.

Page 191: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 191

20 In the Save AutoStyle As window, navigate to the My Objects folder, and save your autostyle as My New AutoStyle.

The default save location for a custom autostyle is My Objects. If you save an autostyle to this folder, it will appear in only your autostyle drop-down list. However, if you would like this autostyle to be available to other users, you should save the autostyle in the Autostyles folder under Public Objects.

21 Close the Region, Category, Year Sales report without saving it.

22 In the Folder List, expand the Public Objects folder, followed by the Reports folder, followed by Business Roles folder, and select the Category Managers folder.

23 In the Object Viewer, double-click the Category Sales Report report to run it.

24 In the report, from the Grid menu, point to Auto Style Selected, and select My New Autostyle. The report should now look like the following:

25 Close the Category Sales Report report without saving it.

Page 192: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

192 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Thresholds

Overview

Configure thresholding conditions to format the US Revenues by Region - Pivoting and Sorting report, as shown by the following image:

To make the report look like the above image, follow the formatting guide below:

• For Revenue greater than $2,500,000, substitute the data value by a green diamond.

• For Revenue between $1,500,000 and $2,500,000, substitute the data by an orange diamond.

• For Revenue below $1,500,000, keep the data value and bold it Red.

Page 193: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 193

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In the Folder List, select the My Reports Exercises folder.

2 In the Object Viewer, double-click the US Revenues by Region - Pivoting and Sorting report to run it.

3 In the report, on the Data menu, select Thresholds.

4 In the Thresholds window, click New Threshold to rename it.

5 In the New Threshold box, type Greater than 2,500,000.

6 Click Click here to start a new qualification.

7 Click Field, and select Revenue.

8 On the Operator menu, select Greater than.

9 On the Value menu, select Type a Value.

10 In the Value box, type 2500000 and press Enter on the keyboard.

11 Click Format, and select Quick Symbol.

12 In the Quick Symbol image menu, select the diamond symbol.

13 On the toolbar, click Edit the threshold formatting.

Page 194: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

194 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

14 In the Format Cells window, click the Font tab.

15 Under Settings, in the Color box, select Green and click OK.

The quick symbol is formatted as a preview.

16 In the Thresholds window, on the toolbar menu, click Add a new threshold.

17 Name this threshold Between 1,500,000 and 2,500,000.

18 Click Click here to start a new qualification.

19 Click Field, and o select Revenue.

20 On the Operator menu, select Between.

21 On the Value menu, select Type a Value.

22 In the Value box, type 1500000 and press Enter on the keyboard.

23 On the second Value menu, select Type a Value.

24 In the Value box, type 2500000 and press Enter on the keyboard.

25 Click Format, and select Quick Symbol.

26 In the Quick Symbol image menu, select the diamond symbol.

27 In the tool bar, clicked the threshold formatting.

Page 195: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 195

28 In the Format Cells window, click the Font tab.

29 Under Settings, in the Color box, select Orange and click OK.

30 In the Thresholds window, on the toolbar, create your third and final threshold by clicking Add a new threshold.

31 Name this threshold Less than 1,500,000.

32 Click Click here to start a new qualification.

33 Click Field, and select Revenue.

34 On the Operator menu, select Less than.

35 On the Value menu, select Type a Value.

36 In the Value box, type 1500000 and press Enter on the keyboard.

Page 196: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

196 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

37 On the toolbar, click Edit the Threshold Formatting.

38 In the Format Cells window, click the Font tab.

39 Under Settings, in the Bold box, select Yes.

40 Under Settings, in the Color box, select Red.

41 Click OK to close the Format Cells window.

42 Click OK again to close the Thresholds window.

43 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

44 In the report, on the File menu, select Save As.

45 In the Save Report As window, navigate to the My Reports Exercises folder and save this report as Threshold Report.

Page 197: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 197

46 Close the Threshold Report.

Locking\Resizing Columns and Rows

Overview

Run the Average and Maximum Revenue per Call Center Transaction report, which can be found using the search functionality. Modify the wordwrap feature and then use the column handles to resize the column width. The initial results should look like the following:

Page 198: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

198 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Then, run the Inventory Received from Suppliers by Quarter, which can be found by using the search functionality. Notice that there are more rows in the report than you can view on one page. The initial results look like the following:

If you scroll down, you will no longer be able to see the column headers. To fix this issue, you need to lock the column headers, so they stay in place when you scroll down through the report.

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

Enable Wordwrapping

1 In Desktop, on the Tools menu, select Search for Objects.

Page 199: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 199

2 On the Name & Location tab, in the Named box, enter Average and Maximum.

3 In the Look in box, browse to the \MicroStrategy Tutorial\Public Objects\Reports folder and click OK.

4 Click Find Now.

5 In the Search Results window, double-click the Average and Maximum Revenue per Call Center Transaction report to run it.

6 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

7 In the report, on the Grid menu, select Options.

8 In the Grid Options window, click the Columns and Rows tab.

9 Clear the Wordwrap check box and click OK.

The title of each metric is now on a single line.

Change column width

10 In the report, on the Grid menu, select View Column Handles.

When the message window appears, click Yes.

The column handles appear above the row and column headers.

Page 200: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

200 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

11 Use the column handles to adjust the width of the metric columns until your report looks like the following:

12 Close the Average and Maximum Revenue per Call Center Transaction report without saving it.

Locking Columns Headers

13 If the New Search window is not open, on the Tools menu, select Search for Objects.

14 On the Name & Location tab, in the Named box, enter Inventory Received from.

15 In the Look in box, browse to the \MicroStrategy Tutorial\Public Objects\Reports folder and click Find Now.

16 In the Search Results window, double-click the Inventory Received from Suppliers by Quarter report to run it.

17 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

18 On the report, scroll down and notice that the column headers are no longer in view.

Page 201: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 201

19 In the report, on the Grid menu, select Lock Column Headers.

20 Scroll down the report and notice that the column headers now stay in place.

21 Close the Inventory Received from Suppliers by Quarter report without saving it.

22 Close the New Search window. If prompted to save the search, select No.

Bar Graph

Overview

Run the Yearly Revenue Growth by Customer Region report (which you can find by using the search functionality) in graph view and make changes to the graph display to make it easier to read. The initial graph will look like the following:

Page 202: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

202 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

It is almost impossible to distinguish the values for Percent Growth. To fix this, you will change the graph type to split dual axes. You will also add data labels to the bars to show the exact value for each data point. Finally, you will change the title of the graph to Revenue and Percent Growth by Customer Region.

The final graph should look like the following:

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In Desktop, on the Tools menu, select Search for Objects.

2 On the Name & Location tab, in the Named box, type the first few words of the report, Yearly Revenue Growth.

3 In the Look in box, browse to the \MicroStrategy Tutorial\Public Objects\Reports folder and click Find Now.

4 In the Search Results window, double-click the Yearly Revenue Growth by Customer Region report to run it.

5 In the Report Editor, on the View menu, select Design View.

Page 203: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 203

6 In the Object Browser, double-click the Time hierarchy.

7 Double-click Year to display the attribute elements.

8 Select 2008 and drag it in the Report Filter area.

9 Click Run.

10 On the View menu, select Graph View.

11 In the Graph Type window, click OK to accept the default graph style.

12 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

Change Graph Type

13 In the graph report, on the Graph menu, select Graph Type.

Page 204: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

204 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

14 In the Graph Type window, on the Vertical tab, select Vertical Bar:DualAxis Stacked.

15 Click OK to close the Graph Type window.

16 On the graph report, on the Graph menu, select Grids and Scales.

17 In the Preferences window, in the Properties Categories list, expand Axes, followed by Y2, and select Axis Labels.

Page 205: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 205

18 In the Y2 - Axis Labels pane, select the Make this a Descending Axis check box.

19 Click OK.

20 Your graph report should now look like the following:

21 On the Graph menu, select Graph Options.

Page 206: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

206 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

22 In the Preferences window, in the Properties Categories list, expand Vertical Bar Options, and select Layout.

23 In the Vertical Bar Options - Layout pane, select the Split Dual Axis check box.

Add Data Labels

24 In the Properties Categories list, expand Series and select Labels and Values.

25 In the Series - Labels and Values pane, select the Show Data Labels check box.

26 In the Labels Location drop-down list, select Outside Maximum.

Change the Graph Title

27 In the Properties Categories list, expand Titles, and select All.

28 In the Titles - All pane, in the Title text box, delete the default and type Revenue and Percent Growth by Customer Region.

29 Click OK to close the Properties window.

30 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

31 In the graph report, on the File menu, select Save As.

32 In the Save Report As window, navigate to the My Reports Exercises folder and save the report as Customer Region Revenue and Growth Graph.

33 Close the Customer Region Revenue and Growth Graph report.

34 Close the New Search window. If prompted to save the search, select No.

Page 207: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 207

Graph with Gauges

Overview

Run the Sales by Quarter and Month report found in your My Reports Exercises folder to graph view, using the gauge display. The final results should look like the following:

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In the Folder List, select the My Reports Exercises folder.

Create a Copy of a Report

2 In the Object Viewer, right-click the Sales by Quarter and Month report you created earlier and select Copy.

3 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the Edit menu, select Paste. A copy of the report is created and named Copy of Sales by Quarter and Month.

Page 208: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

208 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

4 Right-click the Copy of Sales by Quarter and Month report and select Rename.

5 Rename the report to Sales by Quarter.

Remove Units Sold and Month from the Report

6 In the Object Viewer, double-click the Sales by Quarter report to run it.

7 In the report, right-click the Units Sold header and select Remove from Report.

Ensure you select Remove from Report and not Remove from Grid.

8 Click Reexecute Report.

9 In the report, right-click the Month header and select Remove from Report.

10 Click Reexecute Report.

Change to Graph View.

11 In the report, on the View menu, select Graph View.

12 In the Graph Type window, in the list of graph types, select Advanced.

13 Click the Gauge tab and select the Gauge:Gauge graph.

14 Click OK to close the Graph Type window.

Format the Gauge Graph

15 On the graph report, on the Graph menu, select Grids and Scales.

Page 209: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Report Manipulations 209

16 In the Preferences window, expand Axes, followed by Y, and select Axis Labels.

17 Clear the Show gauge title check box.

18 In the Properties Categories list, expand Gauge Options, and select General.

19 In the Gauge Options - General pane, for Gauge Style, click Old.

20 In the Gauges per Row text box, type 4.

Page 210: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

210 Exercises: Report Manipulations © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

21 Clear the Draw Axis Label Outside check box.

22 Click OK to close the Preferences window.

23 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

24 In the graph report, on the File menu, select Save.

25 In the Advanced Save Options window, click Create a local copy of the template.

26 Click OK.

27 Close the Sales by Quarter report.

Page 211: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Report Manipulations 4

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Lesson Summary 211

Lesson Summary

In this lesson you learned:

• Drilling enables you to see data at levels other than that of the original grid or graph. It helps you investigate the data on your report quickly and easily.

• In MicroStrategy Desktop, you can drill down or up within a hierarchy or across to other hierarchies. You can even drill to a completely different template.

• Page-by enables you to select and display subsets of your report results as separate pages. This feature is most useful when you have extremely long report results and scrolling is necessary to see all of the data.

• Data pivoting enables you to rearrange the columns and rows in a report, so you can view data from different perspectives.

• Subtotals reflect accumulations at selected attribute levels and can be applied dynamically to any report. There are various subtotals available to you such as count, minimum, maximum, average, and so forth.

• Sorting enables you to specify the order in which the data in a report for a particular row or column is presented—either ascending or descending. You can sort based on any object that you place on the template. You can also select the sorting criteria and the sorting order.

• Outline mode enables indented grouping of related attributes. Outline mode is useful when users want to display the same report at different levels very quickly.

• You can print a report in grid, graph, grid and graph, or SQL view. The formatting you apply to the report in MicroStrategy Desktop also applies to the printed copy of the report.

Page 212: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Report Manipulations MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials4

212 Lesson Summary © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• You can export a MicroStrategy Desktop report or e-mail a MicroStrategy Desktop report (as an attachment) in any of the following application formats: Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Word, Microsoft Access, plaintext, HTML, and PDF.

• MicroStrategy Desktop features distribution services functionality and improved procedures for existing functionality. In Desktop, you can subscribe reports and documents to history list, cache and mobile devices.

• You can actively collaborate online with other MicroStrategy Desktop users using a powerful feature—notes.

• Formatting involves changing the display of a report. You can format the look and feel of your report by altering the number display, alignment, font, border, and patterns for column and row axes, template object headers and values, and subtotal headers and values.

• A threshold is best understood as conditional formatting of metric values. By defining thresholds for a metric, report developers can format metric values that meet the criteria of their choosing.

• Banding is a method of organizing the appearance of report results in a grid report according to certain criteria. You can band by rows and columns based on either the number of rows or columns or the values of the row and column headers.

• MicroStrategy Desktop enables you to lock row and column headers on a grid report, so while viewing report results, you can scroll horizontally and vertically without losing sight of the row or column headers.

• There are numerous graph properties that enable you to customize nearly every aspect of a graph’s appearance. You can choose from dozens of different graph types and styles. After you choose an overall graph type and graph style, other options enable you to adjust various aspects of the graph, such as the data labels, a legend, its axes, and its titles.

Page 213: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 213

5FILTERS

Lesson Description

This lesson introduces you to report filters. Understanding how to create report filters is a crucial part of creating reports that retrieve only the data that you want to analyze.

In this lesson, you will learn about the different types of report filters, see examples of when you would use each type, and learn how to create them using MicroStrategy Desktop.

Basic knowledge of formal logic is useful in understanding report filters and their concepts, but it is not required.

Page 214: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

214 Lesson Objectives © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

Define the different types of report filters available in MicroStrategy Desktop and create each type using the Filter Editor.

After completing the topics in this lesson, you will be able to:

• Explain the purpose of a report filter and describe the differences between report filters and view filters. (Page 215)

• Use the Filter Editor to create and save report filters. (Page 219)

• Define the different types of report filters, and create each type of report filter using the Filter Editor in MicroStrategy Desktop. (Page 222)

• Define the set operators available in the Filter Editor, and describe how you can use them to combine multiple filter conditions inside a report filter. (Page 230)

Page 215: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. What Is a Filter? 215

What Is a Filter?

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Explain the purpose of a report filter and describe the differences between report filters and view filters.

A report filter specifies the conditions that the data must meet to be included in report results. If you are familiar with SQL syntax, the report filter is usually equivalent to the WHERE clause in a SQL statement.

For example, consider the following diagram, which shows a table of data filtered by three different report filter conditions:

Filter Conditions

As you can see, each report filter condition returns a different result set. You need to know how to design the correct report filter in order to retrieve the desired data.

Page 216: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

216 What Is a Filter? © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

There are two categories of filters in MicroStrategy:

• Report Filter—Enables you to apply filter conditions to a report that appear in the SQL used to retrieve the report result set. The report filter is created as part of the report and is saved with the report definition. You can create a report filter from within the Report Editor or with the Filter Editor. You can filter on an object whether or not it is part of the report template. After you execute a report, you can see the definition of the report filter in the Report Details window.

You can open and close the Report Details window for a report by selecting Report Details from the View menu.

The following illustration shows a report that is filtering on specific regions, even though the Region attribute is not on the template.

Report Filter Based on Specific Regions

Page 217: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. What Is a Filter? 217

• View Filter—Enables you to create a filter on the fly, based only on those objects that exist in the Report Objects window. (These objects may or may not be displayed on the template.) View filters do not appear in the report SQL. Rather, view filters are applied after the data is retrieved from the warehouse, so only a subset of the result set appears in the report view. You can create a view filter with the View Filter window of a report, which you can also use to view the details of existing view filter conditions.

You can open and close the View Filter window in a report by selecting View Filter from the View menu.

The following illustration shows the previous report with a view filter condition of Year 2008. As you can see, the Year attribute is in the Report Objects window (and on the template), and only data for 2008 appears in the report view, even though data for 2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010 was retrieved from the data warehouse:

View Filter Based on Year 2008

Page 218: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

218 What Is a Filter? © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

View filters and the Report Objects window are only available with MicroStrategy OLAP Services. For more information on MicroStrategy OLAP Services, see “MicroStrategy OLAP Services” starting on page 289.

The differences between report filters and view filters is summarized in the following table.

Summary of Differences: Report Filters vs. View Filters

Filter Type SQL Generated May Reference When Applied

Report Filter Every time a change is made; often affects the WHERE clause of a SQL statement

Any object, whether or not it is part of the report

Before the SQL is generated and sent to the data warehouse

View Filter None Only objects in the Report Objects window

After the data is retrieved from the data warehouse

Page 219: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating and Saving Report Filters 219

Creating and Saving Report Filters

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Use the Filter Editor to create and save report filters.

The Filter Editor

When you choose to create a new filter object, the Filter Editor opens, as shown below:

Filter Editor

The Filter Editor has the following windows:

• Object Browser—Enables you to navigate through the project to locate objects you want to use in the report filter definition

• My Shortcuts—Enables you to jump to locations in the Object Browser. You can customize your shortcuts.

For more information on customizing your shortcuts, see “Shortcut Bar” starting on page 45.

Page 220: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

220 Creating and Saving Report Filters © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• Filter definition window—Enables you to add attributes, metrics, advanced filter qualifications, as well as copies or shortcuts to existing report filter objects. Simple filters can be created by dragging and dropping attribute elements from the Object Browser into this window.

Creating a Simple Filter

To launch the Filter Editor:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the File menu, point to New, and select Filter.

2 In the New Filter window, select Empty Filter from the list of filter object templates and click OK.

To create a simple report filter:

1 In the Filter Editor, in the Object Browser, navigate to the Data Explorer.

2 Double-click the hierarchy that contains the attribute on which you want to qualify to display the list of attributes included in that hierarchy.

3 Double-click the attribute on which you want to qualify to expand it to its list of attribute elements.

4 In the list of attribute elements, select the attribute elements you want to see in the report results and drag and drop them into the filter definition window.

Page 221: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating and Saving Report Filters 221

Saving a Filter

To save a report filter:

1 In the Filter Editor, on the File menu, select Save.

2 In the Save Filter As window, navigate to the location where you want to save the filter object.

3 Enter a name for the filter and click Save.

Page 222: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

222 Types of Report Filters © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Types of Report Filters

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Define the different types of report filters, and create each type of report filter using the Filter Editor in MicroStrategy Desktop.

You can create the following types of report filters:

• Attribute qualification

• Set qualification

• Shortcut to a Report (Report qualification)

• Shortcut to a Filter (Filter qualification)

There is also an advanced qualification option that enables you to create advanced filter qualifications, like attribute-to-attribute comparisons and relationship filters. For more information on advanced qualifications, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

Each of the above listed types of report filters is described in the following sections.

The following sections include steps on how to create each type of report filter using the Filter Editor. However, you can create the same types of report filters by following the same steps from within the Report Editor.

Attribute Qualification

Attribute qualification filters enable you to specify the conditions that attribute elements must satisfy to be included in the report results.

Page 223: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Types of Report Filters 223

There are various ways to qualify on an attribute. The following sections explain how to create the most common types of attribute qualification filters.

Attribute Element List Qualification

This type of filter enables you to qualify on a list of attribute elements. Your filter can require that the data returned as report results be “in” the list of attribute elements you specify or “not in” the list of attribute elements you specify. For example, you can create an attribute element list qualification on the Year attribute that only returns data for the attribute elements 2008 and 2009 or returns data for all years except for the attribute elements 2008 and 2009.

To qualify on a list of attribute elements:

1 In the Filter Editor, in the Object Browser, locate the attribute with elements on which you want to qualify and drag and drop the attribute into the filter definition window.

2 In the Attribute Qualification window, in the Operator drop-down list, select either In list or Not in list, as shown below:

Attribute Qualification

Page 224: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

224 Types of Report Filters © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

3 To create the list of attribute elements, click Add.

4 In the Select Objects window, below Available objects, select attribute elements and click > to add them to the Selected objects list.

5 Click OK to close the Select Objects window.

6 Click OK again to close the Attribute Qualification window.

Attribute Form Qualification

This type of filter enables you to qualify on any attribute form of an attribute. For example, you can create an attribute form qualification on the Last Name attribute form of the Customer attribute that only returns data for those customers whose last names begin with the letter “H”.

To qualify on an attribute form:

1 In the Filter Editor, in the Object Browser, locate the attribute with the attribute form on which you want to qualify.

2 Drag and drop the attribute into the filter definition window.

3 In the Attribute Qualification window, in the Qualify On drop-down list, select the attribute form on which you want to qualify.

4 In the Operator drop-down list, select an operator.

5 Below the operator drop-down list, in the text box, type the value you want to use to qualify on the attribute form.

6 Click OK to close the Attribute Qualification window.

Page 225: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Types of Report Filters 225

Date Qualification

This type of filter enables you to qualify on an attribute of the date data type. For example, you can create a date qualification on the Day attribute to only return data for days between January 1, 2009, and February 12, 2009.

To qualify on a date:

1 In the Filter Editor, in the Object Browser, locate the attribute of a date data type on which you want to qualify and drag and drop the attribute into the filter definition window.

2 In the Attribute Qualification window, in the Qualify on drop-down list, select the ID attribute form.

3 In the Operator drop-down list, select an operator.

4 Below the operator drop-down list, in the second drop-down list, type a date or use the drop-down list to select a date from the calendar, as shown below:

Date Entry

5 Click OK to close the Attribute Qualification window.

Page 226: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

226 Types of Report Filters © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Set Qualification

Set qualification filters enable you to restrict report results based on a metric. You can qualify on a metric in the following ways:

• Metric Value—Qualifies on a metric value. For example, “metric value greater than or equal to 10” returns all values for the metric that are 10 or higher.

• Rank—Qualifies on the numeric rank of metric values. For example, “rank top 40” returns the 40 highest metric values for the selected metric.

• Percent—Qualifies on the percentage of the metric values being ranked. For example, “percent top 10” returns all metric values in the top 10% for the selected metric.

The metric may or may not appear on the report template. For example, a store manager might want to see sales numbers for products whose current inventory levels are below a certain level. However, the report does not have to display the inventory figures for those products.

Relationship filters are a more advanced type of set qualification. For more information on relationship filters, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

To qualify on a metric:

1 In the Filter Editor, in the Object Browser, locate the metric on which you want to qualify and drag and drop it into the filter definition window.

Page 227: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Types of Report Filters 227

2 In the Set Qualification window, in the Function drop-down list, select the method of qualification—Metric Value, Rank, or Percent, as shown below:

Set Qualification Window

3 In the Operator drop-down list, select an operator.

4 Below the operator drop-down list, in the text box, type the value you want to use for the metric qualification.

5 Click OK to close the Set Qualification window.

Shortcut to a Report (Report As Filter)

The result set of an existing report object can be used as a report filter condition for another report. Often, the result set of one report is exactly what is needed to filter another report. Rather than create a report filter that mimics the results of the first report, the first report itself can be used as a report filter inside the second report.

Page 228: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

228 Types of Report Filters © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

For example, you may be assessing customers and the items these customers purchase. Specifically, you would like to find your most valued customers and see what items they are purchasing in specific Categories. In this example, “Top 5 Customers by Revenue” and “Customers who spent more than $2,000,” are existing reports that are used to filter a third report, as shown below:

.Reports As Filters

Reports with consolidations or custom groups cannot be used inside a report filter. For more information on consolidations and custom groups, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

To use a report as a filter:

1 In the Filter Editor, in the Object Browser, locate the reports with which you want to filter, and drag and drop them into the filter definition window.

Page 229: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Types of Report Filters 229

Shortcut to a Filter (Filter Qualification)

Using existing report filter objects to define other report filters can be thought of as embedding filters. It provides a useful means of managing and leveraging existing report filter objects. For example, you may have already created the following report filters: Year 2008, Northwest Region, and Electronics Category. You originally created these three report filters to be used on other, individual reports. However, now you have a report that requires all three of these filter conditions. Rather than having to redefine these three filter conditions in a new report filter, you can simply reuse the existing report filter objects.

To create a filter qualification:

1 In the Filter Editor, in the Object Browser, locate the filters with which you want to filter and drag and drop them into the filter definition window.

Page 230: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

230 Set Operators © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Set Operators

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Define the set operators available in the Filter Editor, and describe how you can use them to combine multiple filter conditions inside a report filter.

When a report filter has multiple conditions, they are always combined with set operators. Set operators govern the interaction between different filter conditions. Whenever you have more than one condition in a report filter, you can change the set operator to any of the following:

• AND

• OR

• OR NOT

• AND NOT

For example, suppose you have a filter with the following conditions:

• Year = 2008

• Region = Northeast

Page 231: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Set Operators 231

By default, the set operator inserted between filter conditions is AND. Therefore, using the above examples, the following illustration shows the impact of the set operator AND on a result set:

Set Operator AND

As shown, only revenue generated in 2008 in the Northeast is returned in the result set.

The following illustration shows the impact of the set operator OR on a result set:

Set Operator OR

Page 232: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

232 Set Operators © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

As shown, revenue generated in either 2008 or the Northeast or in both 2006 and the Northeast is returned in the result set.

The following illustration shows the impact of the set operator OR NOT on a result set:

Set Operator OR NOT

In this case, revenue generated in 2008 in any region (including the Northeast) or revenue generated in all other years in any region except for the Northeast is returned in the result set.

Page 233: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Set Operators 233

Finally, the following illustration shows the impact of the set operator AND NOT on a result set:

Set Operator AND NOT

As shown, revenue generated in 2008 in any region except the Northeast is returned in the result set.

Page 234: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

234 Set Operators © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To change the set operator:

1 In the Filter Editor, add more than one condition to the filter definition window.

2 In the filter definition window, right-click the set operator, point to Toggle Operator, and select the desired set operator, as shown below:

Toggle Operator

Page 235: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Filters 235

Exercises: Filters

Creating a Filter

Overview

In this exercise, you will create a new folder in the My Objects folder and name it My Filters Exercises. You will then create a report filter for the year 2008 and save it in the My Filter Exercises folder.

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

Create the My Filters Exercises folder

1 In Desktop, in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project, in the Folder List, expand the My Personal Objects folder and select the My Objects folder.

2 On the File menu, point to New, and select Folder.

3 Name the folder My Filters Exercises.

Create the Report Filter

4 In the Object Viewer, double-click the My Filters Exercises folder to begin working in it.

5 On the File menu, point to New, and select Filter.

6 In the New Filter window, leave Empty Filter selected, and click OK.

Page 236: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

236 Exercises: Filters © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

7 In the Filter Editor, in the Object Browser, double-click the Time hierarchy to expand it.

8 Drag and drop the Year attribute into the Filter definition window.

9 In the Attribute Qualification window, in the Qualify On drop-down list, leave Elements selected.

10 In the Operator drop-down list, leave In list selected.

11 Click Add.

12 In the Select Objects window, below Available objects, select 2008 and click the > button to move it to the Selected Objects list.

13 Click OK to close the Select Objects window.

14 Click OK again to close the Attribute Qualification window.

15 In the Filter Editor, click Save and Close.

16 In the Save Filter As window, navigate to the My Filters Exercises folder, and save the filter as Year 2008.

You will use this report filter in a later exercise.

Creating Another Filter

Overview

Create another report filter object that includes the following items: Jump Start Your Brain, The Joy of Work, Nutrition 101, Pilates: The Way Forward, Nanotechnology, and Being Digital. Name the filter List of Items, and save it in your My Filters Exercises folder.

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Page 237: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Filters 237

Detailed Instructions

1 In the Folder List, select the My Filters Exercises folder.

2 On the File menu, point to New, and select Filter.

3 In the New Filter window, leave Empty Filter selected, and click OK.

4 In the Filter Editor, in the Object Browser, double-click the Products hierarchy to expand it.

5 Double-click the Subcategory attribute to expand it to its list of attribute elements

6 Double-click Business.

7 Double-click Item.

8 Select Jump Start Your Brain and, holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard, select The Joy of Work.

9 Drag and drop them both into the filter definition window.

10 In the Object Browser, click View contents one level up twice to get back to the list of subcategories.

11 Double-click Sports & Health.

12 Double-click Item.

13 Select Nutrition 101 (if not already selected) and, while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard, select Pilates: The Way Forward.

14 Drag and drop them both into the filter definition window.

15 Click View contents one level up twice to get back to the list of subcategories.

Page 238: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

238 Exercises: Filters © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

16 Double-click Science & Technology.

17 Double-click Item.

18 Select Nanotechnology (if not already selected) and, while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard, select Being Digital.

19 Drag and drop them both into the Filter definition window.

You should now have six items in the filter definition window.

20 In the Filter Editor, click Save and Close.

21 In the Save Filter As window, navigate to the My Filters Exercises folder, and save the filter as List of Items.

You will use this filter in a later exercise.

Qualifying on a Metric

Overview

Create a report filter for Revenue over $5,000,000. Run a report with this new filter and a template that has Region in the rows and Revenue in the columns. The final report should look like the following:

When you are finished, keep the report open for the next exercise.

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Page 239: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Filters 239

Detailed Instructions

Create a Metric Qualification Report Filter

1 In the Folder List, select the My Filters Exercises folder.

2 On the File menu, point to New, and select Filter.

3 In the New Filter window, leave Empty Filter selected, and click OK.

4 In the Filter Editor, in the Object Browser, in the My Shortcuts bar, click Public Objects.

5 In the Object Browser, double-click the Metrics folder.

6 Double-click the Sales Metrics folder.

7 Drag and drop the Revenue metric into the Filter definition window.

8 In the Set Qualification window, under Parameters, in the Function drop-down list, leave Metric Value selected.

9 In the Operator drop-down list, select Greater than.

10 Below the operator drop-down list, in the Value text box, type 5000000 (without commas).

11 Click OK to close the Set Qualification window.

12 In the Filter Editor, click Save and Close.

13 In the Save Filter As window, navigate to the My Filters Exercises folder, and save the filter as Revenue > $5,000,000.

Create and Run a Report Using the Report Filter

14 On the File menu, point to New, and select Report.

15 In the New Grid window, leave Blank Report selected, and click OK.

16 In the Report Editor, in the Object Browser, double-click the Geography hierarchy.

Page 240: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

240 Exercises: Filters © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

17 Drag and drop the Region attribute into the rows of the template definition window.

18 In the Object Browser, in My Shortcuts, click Public Objects.

19 In the Object Browser, double-click the Metrics folder.

20 Double-click the Sales Metrics folder.

21 Drag and drop the Revenue metric into the columns of the template definition window.

22 In the Object Browser, in My Shortcuts, click My Personal Objects.

23 In the Object Browser, double-click the My Objects folder.

24 Double-click the My Filters Exercises folder.

25 Drag and drop the Revenue > $5,000,000 report filter into the Report Filter definition window.

26 In the Report Editor, click Run.

27 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

28 Keep the report open for the next exercise.

Page 241: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Filters 241

Combining Two Filters in a Report

Overview

Using the Report Editor, modify the report from the previous exercise by replacing the Revenue > $5,000,000 report filter with the List of Items and Year 2008 filters. The report should look like the following:

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In the report from the last exercise, on the toolbar, click Design View.

2 In the Report Editor, in the Object Browser, in My Shortcuts, click My Personal Objects.

3 In the Object Browser, double-click the My Objects folder.

4 Double-click the My Filters Exercises folder.

5 Drag and drop both the List of Items and Year 2008 report filters into the Report Filter definition window.

Page 242: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

242 Exercises: Filters © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

6 In the Report Filter definition window, right-click the Revenue > $5,000,000 report filter, and select Remove.

7 In the MicroStrategy Desktop window, click Yes to confirm the deletion.

8 In the Report Editor, click Grid View to run the report.

9 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

10 In the report, click Save and Close.

11 In the Save Report As window, navigate to the My Reports Exercises folder, and save the report as Regional Revenue for Year 2008 and List of Items.

Page 243: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Filters 5

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Lesson Summary: 243

Lesson Summary:

In this lesson you learned:

• A report filter specifies the conditions that the data must meet to be included in report results. If you are familiar with SQL syntax, the report filter is usually equivalent to the WHERE clause in a SQL statement.

• There are two categories of filters in MicroStrategy—Report Filter and View Filter.

• The Report Filter enables you to apply filter conditions to a report that appear in the SQL used to retrieve the report result set. The report filter is created as part of the report and is saved with the report definition.

• The View Filter enables you to create a filter on the fly, based only on those objects that exist in the Report Objects window.

• View filters do not appear in the report SQL. Rather, view filters are applied after the data is retrieved from the warehouse, so only a subset of the result set appears in the report view.

• You can create the following types of report filters—Attribute qualification, Set qualification, Shortcut to a Report, and Shortcut to a Filter.

• Attribute qualification filters enable you to specify the conditions that attribute elements must satisfy to be included in the report results.

• Set qualification filters enable you to restrict report results based on a metric.

• Using existing report filter objects to define other report filters can be thought of as embedding filters. It provides a useful means of managing and leveraging existing report filter objects.

Page 244: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Filters MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials5

244 Lesson Summary: © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• When a report filter has multiple conditions, they are always combined with set operators. Set operators govern the interaction between different filter conditions. Whenever you have more than one condition in a report filter, you can change the set operator to any of the following—AND, OR, OR NOT, and AND NOT.

Page 245: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 245

6METRICS

Lesson Description

This lesson focuses on creating metrics in MicroStrategy Desktop. Metrics define the analytical calculations you want to perform against your data warehouse; they produce the results that you analyze for decision-making purposes.

This lesson begins with a brief look at facts. Facts are the MicroStrategy objects on which metrics are based. Distinguishing between facts and metrics and understanding how facts are used to build metrics is essential to understanding metrics.

In this lesson, you will learn how to create a variety of metrics, including simple and compound metrics. More advanced metrics such as level metrics and transformation metrics are discussed in the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

Page 246: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

246 Lesson Objectives © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

Define the different types of metrics, and create them using the Metric Editor in MicroStrategy Desktop.

After completing the topics in this lesson, you will be able to:

• Explain the purpose of facts. (Page 247)

• Explain the purpose of metrics. (Page 249)

• Define the different types of metrics. (Page 253)

• Define the components of a metric, and use the Metric Editor to create and save metrics. (Page 257)

• Define metric formatting properties, including the number format, header display, and available subtotals. (Page 264)

Page 247: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. What Is a Fact? 247

What Is a Fact?

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Explain the purpose of facts.

Understanding facts is key to understanding metrics. Facts are values that represent business performance. Some characteristics of facts are the following:

• They are typically numeric.

• They can be aggregated to produce meaningful results.

Facts are stored in tables in the data warehouse. In a MicroStrategy project, you build fact schema objects that point to those columns that store fact data. For example, the MicroStrategy Tutorial project has facts such as Revenue, Cost, and Freight that point to columns in tables that store values for these measurements.

The image below displays some of the fact schema objects in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project:

Fact Schema Objects

Page 248: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

248 What Is a Fact? © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

If you open a fact with the Fact Editor, you see the warehouse columns and tables to which it is mapped. The following image displays the definition of the Revenue fact in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project:

Fact Editor for Revenue Fact

As shown above, one of the columns to which the Revenue fact is mapped is the ORDER_AMT column in the ORDER_FACT table. The fact definition dictates where in the data warehouse the MicroStrategy Engine goes when it needs to retrieve Revenue data.

For more information on the Fact Editor and creating facts refer to the MicroStrategy Architect: Project Design course.

Page 249: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. What Is a Metric? 249

What Is a Metric?

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Explain the purpose of metrics.

In the last section, you learned that a fact is a MicroStrategy schema object that points to columns in the data warehouse that store fact data. A metric is an object you create in MicroStrategy Desktop that performs a calculation on a fact. A metric can employ everything from basic function, like sum, average, or standard deviation to more advanced functions like moving average, correlation, or n-tiling.

MicroStrategy Desktop provides over 200 built-in functions and operators for use in creating metric calculations, including statistical, mathematical, and financial calculations. You can view these functions in Desktop in the Schema Objects\Functions and Operators folder.

Page 250: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

250 What Is a Metric? © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

For example, if you want to see Average Revenue on a report, you need to build a metric that averages the Revenue fact values. The formula for an Average Revenue metric would look like the following:

Average Revenue Formula

To better understand the relationship between facts and metrics and how they are used together to display calculations in reports, consider the following example.

In your data warehouse, you have the following ORDER_FACT table, as shown below:

ORDER_FACT Table

Page 251: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. What Is a Metric? 251

In this table, the ORDER_AMT column stores the revenue amount for each order. You want to be able to access the revenue data in this table, so you create a Revenue fact schema object that points to the ORDER_AMT column in the ORDER_FACT table. The Revenue fact now enables the MicroStrategy Engine to retrieve revenue data from the ORDER_AMT column of the ORDER_FACT table.

Next, you want to view both average and total revenue figures on a report. To calculate average revenue, you create an Average Revenue metric whose formula is Avg(Revenue), where Revenue is the Revenue fact you created earlier. The Avg function calculates the average revenue based on the values in the ORDER_AMT column.

To calculate total revenue, you create a Total Revenue metric whose formula is Sum(Revenue), where Revenue is again the Revenue fact you created earlier. The Sum function calculates the total revenue based on the values in the ORDER_AMT column.

After you have created these two metrics, you then place them on a report like the following:

Report with Metrics

Page 252: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

252 What Is a Metric? © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

The above report shows the average and total revenue by day. Each metric employs a different calculation, but as you know, both are based on the same Revenue fact. You can use the same fact to build any number of metrics. The metrics above are simple metrics, but you can also create much more advanced metrics that have more complex expressions and perform more advanced calculations. You can even combine metrics to create new metrics.

For more information on creating basic metrics, see “Metric Creation” starting on page 257. For more information on creating advanced metrics, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

By default, metrics aggregate fact data to the report level, which is determined by the attributes on the report template. Therefore, if you want to view the same revenue data at the Month-level instead of the Day-level, you can modify the report template to include the Month attribute instead of the Day attribute, like the example below:

Report Modified with Month Attribute

You can create level metrics to override the default behavior of aggregating fact data to the report level. For more information on level metrics, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

Page 253: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Types of Metrics 253

Types of Metrics

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Define the different types of metrics.

Metrics can belong to one of the following categories:

• Simple

• Nested

• Compound

• Derived

Derived metrics are not covered in this lesson. For more information on derived metrics, see the “MicroStrategy OLAP Services” lesson starting on page 289.

Simple Metrics

As the name implies, simple metrics are the most basic metrics. You can use simple metrics to create other types of metrics.

In their structure, simple metrics:

• Include one or more aggregation functions

• Are based on one or more facts or attributes

• Include the specified level at which they are to be calculated

• May include conditions that apply to its calculation

• May include transformations, which are applied prior to its calculation

The following are examples of simple metrics:

• Sum(Cost){~}

Page 254: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

254 Types of Metrics © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• Count(Customer){~}

• Sum (Revenue) {~} - Sum (Cost) {~}

The {~} in these examples means the metric values are to be calculated at the report level, the lowest attribute level on the report. For example, if the report shows sales by year and month, the numbers will be calculated to reflect monthly sales data. Creating metrics that use levels, conditions, and transformations is covered in the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

Nested Metrics

Nested metrics are metrics that perform multiple aggregations by placing one calculation formula inside, or “nested,” in another. They provide a convenient way to use metric functionality when tables in the data warehouse do not include data at the level needed for a specific type of analysis. The result of the inner calculation formula is stored in an intermediate table, which is then used to calculate the result of the outer calculation formula. As such, you can obtain and analyze data at levels not physically available in the data warehouse.

For example, you may want to see profit data averaged at the year level, but existing fact tables provide only month-level profit data. You can use nested aggregation to obtain the desired results. To calculate a yearly average for profit, create a nested metric with the following metric formula:

Avg(Sum(Profit){~, Month}){~, Year}

In calculating the above metric, the MicroStrategy Engine first sums the profit for each month and stores those results in an intermediate fact table. The MicroStrategy Engine then uses those results to calculate an average profit for each year.

In the inner calculation formula, the {~, Month} applied to Sum(Profit) means that the calculation formula is calculated at the month level, regardless of what attributes appear on the report.

Page 255: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Types of Metrics 255

The {~,Year} applied to the outer Avg calculation formula means that the calculation is calculated, or grouped by, the year level, regardless of what attributes appear on the report.

The intermediate tables created to calculate nested metrics only serve the purposes of a specific metric calculation; they cannot be shared across other metric calculations.

In their structure, nested metrics:

• Are based on either facts or attributes

• Place at least one aggregation function inside of another aggregation function

• Include one or more level definitions

• May include one or more conditions that apply to its calculation

• May include one or more transformations, which are applied prior to its calculation

Essentially, nested metrics are a special type of simple metric, in which one simple metric formula is used to enable the calculation of another simple metric. You only need nested metrics when the level at which data is stored in the data warehouse prevents it from being calculated and analyzed at a desired level. Nested metrics provide an alternative to modifying the physical data warehouse tables.

For more information on how to create nested metrics with the Metric Editor, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

Compound Metrics

Compound metrics are created by combining one or more metric objects with one or more mathematical operators or constants. You can create compound metrics using simple, nested, or other compound metrics.

Page 256: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

256 Types of Metrics © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

The following are examples of compound metrics:

• ([Region Revenue] / [Company Revenue])

• [Profit] * .15

The table below shows what can and cannot be used to define a compound metric:

A compound metric inherits the levels, conditions, and transformations included in the component metrics of its definition. You cannot include levels, conditions, or transformations in the compound metric itself.

Compound metrics are automatically updated with changes that are made to the component metrics that are used in its definition.

Components of Compound Metrics

Component Allowed Not Allowed

Simple metrics X

Nested metrics X

Compound metrics X

Simple metrics with levels, conditions, or transformations as part of their definition

X

Numeric constants X

Level definitions in the compound metric definition

X

Condition definitions in the compound metric definition

X

Transformations in the compound metric definition

X

Page 257: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Metric Creation 257

Metric Creation

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Define the components of a metric, and use the Metric Editor to create and save metrics.

Metric Editor

When you choose to create a new metric, the Metric Editor opens and has various options, as shown below:

Metric Editor

Page 258: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

258 Metric Creation © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Formula Tab

This tab is used to define a metric. The Formula tab contains the following:

• Object Browser—Enables you to navigate through the project to locate objects you want to use in the metric filter definition

• My Shortcuts—Enables you to jump to locations in the Object Browser. You can customize your shortcuts.

For more information on customizing your shortcuts, see “Shortcut Bar” starting on page 45.

• Metric definition window—Displays the complete metric definition, including its formula, calculation level, condition (if any), and transformation (if any). The bottom portion of the metric definition window changes depending on what part of the metric definition you have selected in the top portion.

When you first open the Metric Editor to create a new metric, the metric definition window is empty.

Subtotals/Aggregation Tab

This tab is used to configure subtotal and dynamic aggregation settings for a metric. The Subtotals/Aggregation tab contains the following:

• Total subtotal function—Enables you to determine the aggregate function used to calculate the Total subtotal values for the metric.

• Dynamic aggregation function—Enables you to determine the aggregate function used by the Analytical Engine for dynamic aggregation. Dynamic aggregation occurs when a lower-level attribute is present in the Report Objects window but is not displayed on the report template, which is only possible with MicroStrategy OLAP Services.

For more information on MicroStrategy OLAP Services, see the “MicroStrategy OLAP Services” lesson starting on page 289.

Page 259: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Metric Creation 259

Form more information on dynamic aggregation, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

• Select the subtotals you want available for this metric—Enables you to specify which subtotals you want to be available for the metric when it is placed on a report template that displays subtotals.

The Metric Editor also contains the Insert Function Wizard, which enables you to define a metric formula using a wizard interface. You can access the Insert Function Wizard from the toolbar above the metric definition window:

Insert Function Wizard

Page 260: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

260 Metric Creation © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

The Insert Function Wizard enables you to use any of the functions provided in MicroStrategy Desktop, as shown below:

MicroStrategy Desktop Functions

Metric Components

Metrics have the following components:

• Formula—Specifies the calculation to be performed, including which facts, attributes, or metrics are used. If you are familiar with SQL syntax, it is the component of the metric that is included in the SELECT clause of a SQL statement.

Page 261: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Metric Creation 261

• Level (Dimensionality)—Specifies the level to which a metric aggregates:

– Target—Determines the attribute or hierarchy to which a metric aggregates.

– Filtering—Determines how the metric interacts with the report filter. If you are familiar with SQL syntax, it is the component of the metric that is included in the WHERE clause of a SQL statement.

– Grouping—Determines how the metric is or is not grouped. If you are familiar with SQL syntax, it is the component of the metric that is included in the GROUP BY clause of a SQL statement.

• Conditionality—Enables you to associate an existing filter object with the metric, so only data that meets the filter conditions is included in the calculation.

• Transformation—Enables you to associate an existing transformation schema object with a metric. Transformations offset the metric values to selected attributes. Although transformations can be based on any attribute, they are most frequently based on time-related attributes (for example, “last year” or “6 months ago”).

The formula and level (dimensionality) metric components are required for all metric definitions. If you do not explicitly specify a level, the metric defaults to report level. You can modify any of the above listed metric components with the Metric Editor.

For more information on the level, condition, or transformation components of a metric, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

Creating a Simple Metric

Creating a simple metric involves defining a metric formula, determining which subtotals to make available, and formatting the metric header and values.

Page 262: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

262 Metric Creation © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Create a Simple Metric Formula

To launch the Metric Editor

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the File menu, point to New, and select Metric.

2 In the New Metric window, select Empty Metric from the list of metric object templates.

3 Click OK.

To create a simple metric formula:

1 In the Metric Editor, on the Formula tab, in the Object Browser, locate the fact or attribute you want to use in the metric formula and drag and drop it into the metric definition window.

The default aggregate function applied to a fact is Sum. For example, if you drag and drop the Revenue fact into the metric definition window, the resulting metric formula would be Sum(Revenue). The default aggregate function applied to an attribute is Count.

You can change the aggregate function by using the Object Browser to locate the function you want to use and dragging and dropping it onto the existing aggregate function in the metric definition window.

2 Click the Subtotals / Aggregation tab and make changes to the settings as needed.

For more information on modifying the settings on the Subtotals / Aggregation tab, see “Subtotals/Aggregation Tab” starting on page 265.

Page 263: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Metric Creation 263

Saving a Metric

To save a metric:

1 In the Metric Editor, on the File menu, select Save.

2 In the Save As window, navigate to the location where you want to save the metric.

3 Enter a name for the metric and click Save.

Page 264: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

264 Metric Formatting © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Metric Formatting

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Define metric formatting properties, including the number format, header display, and available subtotals.

Metric Value and Header Formatting

Using the Format Cells window, you can specify formatting properties for a metric’s report header and for the numeric values it displays. The following image shows the metric Format Cells window:

Format Cells Window

Page 265: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Metric Formatting 265

The Format Cells window has the following tabs:

• Number—Enables you to determine how metric values are displayed. For example, you can determine whether values appear as general numbers, percentages, or currency. You can also determine whether the values will appear with or without decimal places.

The Numbers tab is only relevant to metric values.

• Alignment—Enables you to control the vertical and horizontal alignment of the metric header or metric values and configure wordwrapping

• Font—Enables you to format the font and color of the metric header or metric values

• Border—Enables you to adjust the cell borders containing data

• Background—Enables you to specify a background pattern and color for the metric header or metric values

To set metric formatting properties:

1 In the Metric Editor, on the Tools menu, point to Formatting, and select Headers or Values.

2 In the Format Cells window, click the appropriate tab and format the metric header or values as desired.

3 Click OK to close the Format Cells window.

Subtotals/Aggregation Tab

Subtotals

After you define a metric formula, you can determine which subtotals are available for the metric. By default, all subtotals are available. The following steps describe how to disable unwanted subtotals for a metric.

Page 266: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

266 Metric Formatting © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To disable subtotals for a metric:

1 In the Metric Editor, click the Subtotals / Aggregation tab.

2 In the Available subtotals for metric list, select the subtotal you want to disable and click < to move it to the Project subtotals list.

3 Repeat step 2 for any other subtotals you want to disable for the metric.

The Total subtotal has its own setting for disabling it for a metric. To disable the Total subtotal, on the Subtotals/Aggregation tab, in the Total subtotal function list, select None.

The subtotals you disable are not displayed, even when the metric is used on a report where subtotals are selected.

Page 267: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Metric Formatting 267

Total Subtotal Function

Enabling subtotals is a common report manipulation, which can seem rather simple. However, consider what happens when you have a metric, Count Distinct (Items Sold), on your report, as in the following illustration:

Count Distinct

Since the same item could have sold on more than one date in more than one month, simply summing across the Count Distinct (Items Sold) metric values for each month can no longer be used to calculate an accurate Total subtotal for the metric. In other words, 522 may not be the number of distinct items that sold across the five months.

So, what do we do? Essentially, if you want to keep the Month attribute on the report template with the Count Distinct (Items Sold) metric, it would make more sense to disable the Total subtotal for that metric, rather than display an incorrect Total subtotal value.

Page 268: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

268 Metric Formatting © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To disable the Total subtotal function for a metric:

1 In the Metric Editor of the metric for which you want to disable the Total subtotal, click the Subtotals / Aggregation tab.

2 In the Total subtotal function drop-down list, select None.

The Total subtotal function setting enables you to either completely disable the Total subtotal or simply change the aggregate function used to calculate the Total subtotal values for a metric. Selecting Default uses the default operator for that type of metric, which is typically Sum. Selecting None disables the Total subtotal entirely. You can also select from a variety of other aggregate functions (for example, Average or Maximum) to calculate the Total subtotal values.

3 In the Metric Editor, click Save and Close.

With the Total subtotal for the Count Distinct (Items Sold) metric disabled, the report now looks much better:

Total Subtotal for Count Distinct

Page 269: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Metric Formatting 269

Smart Metrics

You may need to select the Allow Smart Metric check box for compound metrics and some simple metrics (those that combine two or more calculation formulas with arithmetic operators). When the Allow Smart Metric check box is selected for a metric, it changes the manner by which its metric values, including any of its subtotals, are calculated. You should select the Allow Smart Metric check box any time strictly summing the metric values does not produce a meaningful Total subtotal value.

For example, consider the following report:

If you choose to display the Total subtotal without using smart totals for the Ratio of Discount to Revenue metric, you get the following results:

The Total value in the last column is incorrect; it is strictly a sum of the percentages of the Ratio of Discount to Revenue metric. To calculate a meaningful Total value for this metric, the Total value of the Discount metric must be divided by the Total value of the Revenue metric, and to do this, you must select the Allow Smart Metric check box.

Yearly Sales

Year Revenue Discount Ratio of Discount to Revenue

2009 100 25 25%

2009 200 50 25%

2009 100 50 50%

Yearly Sales

Year Revenue Discount Ratio of Discount to Revenue

2009 100 25 25%

2009 200 50 25%

2009 100 50 50%

Total 400 125 100%

Page 270: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

270 Metric Formatting © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

The Allow Smart Metric setting ensures that the Total value for the Ratio of Discount to Revenue metric is calculated using the Total values of the Discount and Revenue metrics, rather than simply summing across the percentages of the Ratio of Discount to Revenue metric. You can refer to this behavior as “smart totaling.” If you select the Allow Smart Metric check box for the Ratio of Discount to Revenue metric, you get the following, correct results:

Yearly Sales

Year Total Sales Discount SalesRatio of Discount Sales to Total Sales

2009 100 25 25%

2009 200 50 25%

2009 100 50 50%

Total 400 125 31.25%

Page 271: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Metric Formatting 271

To enable the Allow Smart Metric setting for a metric:

1 In the Metric Editor of the metric for which you want to enable smart totaling, click the Subtotals / Aggregation tab.

2 Select the Allow Smart Metric check box.

3 Click Save and Close.

Page 272: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

272 Exercises: Metrics © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Exercises: Metrics

Create a Simple Metric—Cost

Overview

In this exercise, you will create a Cost metric and save it in a new folder called My Metrics Exercises. The Cost metric formula is a sum of the Cost fact.

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

Create the My Metrics Exercises folder

1 In Desktop, in the Folder List, in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project, expand the My Personal Objects folder, and select the My Objects folder.

2 On the File menu, point to New, and select Folder.

3 Name the folder My Metrics Exercises.

Create the Simple Metric

4 In the Object Viewer, double-click the My Metrics Exercises folder to begin working in it.

5 On the File menu, point to New, and select Metric.

6 In the New Metric window, leave Empty Metric selected, and click OK.

Page 273: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Metrics 273

7 In the Metric Editor, in the Object Browser, drag and drop the Cost fact into the metric definition window.

By default, SUM is added as the aggregate function.

8 In the Metric Editor, on the Tools menu, point to Formatting, and select Values.

9 In the Format Cells window, on the Number tab, set the Category to Currency, change Decimals places to 2, and set the Negative numbers to appear in red with no negative sign and no parentheses.

10 Click OK to close the Format Cells window.

11 In the Metric Editor, click Save and Close.

12 In the Save As window, navigate to the My Metrics Exercises folder, and save the metric as Cost.

Page 274: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

274 Exercises: Metrics © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

There is already another Cost metric in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project, but identically named objects may exist as long as they reside in different folders. Even so, it is important that a company create and follow standard naming conventions to avoid any confusion.

You will use this metric on a report in a later exercise.

Create a Simple Metric—Revenue

Overview

Create a new Revenue metric using the Revenue fact and save it in your My Metrics Exercises folder. The Revenue metric formula is a sum of the Revenue fact.

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In the Folder List, select the My Metrics Exercises folder.

2 On the File menu, point to New, and select Metric.

3 In the New Metric window, leave Empty Metric selected, and click OK.

4 In the Metric Editor, in the Object Browser, drag and drop the Revenue fact into the metric definition window.

By default, SUM is added as the aggregate function.

5 In the Metric Editor, on the Tools menu, point to Formatting, and select Values.

Page 275: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Metrics 275

6 In the Format Cells window, on the Number tab, set the Category to Currency, change the Decimals places to 2, and set the Negative numbers to appear in red with no negative sign and no parentheses.

7 Click OK to close the Format Cells window.

8 In the Metric Editor, click Save and Close.

9 In the Save As window, navigate to the My Metrics Exercises folder, and save the metric as Revenue.

There is already another Revenue metric in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project.

You will use this metric on a report in a later exercise.

Use the New Metrics in a Report

Overview

Create and run a report that contains the Item attribute and your new Cost and Revenue metrics. The first few rows of the report should look like the following:

Save the report as Item, Cost, Revenue.

Page 276: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

276 Exercises: Metrics © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In the Folder List, expand the My Reports folder, and select the My Reports Exercises folder.

2 In the Object Viewer, right-click in a blank area and select New, followed by Report.

3 In the New Grid window, keep Blank Report selected, and click OK.

4 In the Report Editor, in the Object Browser, double-click the Products hierarchy to expand it.

5 Drag and drop Item into the rows of the template definition window.

6 In the Object Browser, in My Shortcuts, click My Personal Objects.

7 Double-click the My Objects folder.

8 Double-click the My Metrics Exercises folder.

9 Drag and drop the Revenue metric into the columns of the template definition window.

10 Drag and drop the Cost metric to the right of Revenue in the template definition window.

11 In the Report Editor, click Save and Close.

12 In the Save Report As window, navigate to your My Reports Exercises folder, and save the report as Item, Cost, Revenue.

13 In the Folder List, select your My Reports Exercises folder.

14 In the Object Viewer, double-click the Item, Cost, Revenue report to run it.

Page 277: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Metrics 277

15 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

16 Close the Item, Cost, Revenue report.

Create a Compound Metric—Profit Margin

Overview

Create a compound metric called Profit Margin, using the Revenue and Cost metrics you created earlier. You should define Profit Margin as (Revenue - Cost)/Revenue. Save the metric in your My Metrics Exercises folder.

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In the Folder List, select the My Metrics Exercises folder.

2 On the File menu, point to New, and select Metric.

3 In the New Metric window, leave Empty Metric selected, and click OK.

4 In the Metric Editor, in the Object Browser, in My Shortcuts, click Home.

5 In the Object Browser, double-click the My Personal Objects folder.

6 Double-click the My Objects folder.

7 Double-click the My Metrics Exercises folder.

Page 278: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

278 Exercises: Metrics © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

8 Drag and drop the Revenue and Cost metrics into the metric definition window and use the arithmetic operators on the toolbar in the metric definition window to define the following metric formula:

((Revenue – Cost) / Revenue)

Make sure you use the metrics in the My Metrics Exercises folder you created earlier, and not the facts of the same names.

9 In the Metric Editor, click Save and Close.

10 In the Save As window, navigate to the My Metrics Exercises folder, and save the metric as Profit Margin.

There is already another Profit Margin metric in the MicroStrategy Tutorial project.

You will use this metric on a report in a later exercise.

Use Profit Margin in a Report

Overview

Modify the Item, Cost, Revenue report to create a report that contains Category, Item, Revenue, Cost, and Profit Margin. Name the report Compound Metric - Profit Margin and save it in your My Reports Exercises folder. The first few rows of the report should look like the following:

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Page 279: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Metrics 279

Detailed Instructions

1 In the Folder List, select your My Reports Exercises folder

2 In the Object Viewer, right-click the Item, Cost, Revenue report, and select Edit.

3 In the Object Browser, double-click the Products hierarchy to expand it.

4 Drag and drop Category to the left of Item in the template definition window.

5 In the Object Browser, in My Shortcuts, click My Personal Objects.

6 In the Object Browser, double-click the My Objects folder.

7 Double-click the My Metrics Exercises folder.

8 Drag and drop Profit Margin to the right of Cost in the template definition window.

9 In the Report Editor, on the File menu, select Save As.

10 In the Save Report As window, navigate to your My Reports Exercises folder, and save the report as Compound Metric - Profit Margin.

11 In the Report Editor, click Run.

Notice that the metric values for Profit Margin appear as zeros because you have not yet formatted the Profit Margin metric as a percent.

Format a Compound Metric - Profit Margin

12 In the report, on the View menu, select Design View.

Page 280: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

280 Exercises: Metrics © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

13 In the Report Editor, in the template definition window, right-click the Profit Margin metric, and select Edit.

14 If you get the following warning: “Please note that the changes that you do to this object will not be visible unless you close and re-open this specific report”, click OK.

15 In the Metric Editor, on the Tools menu, point to Formatting, and select Values.

16 In the Format Cells window, on the Number tab, set Category to Percent and the Decimal places to 2.

17 Click OK to close the Format Cells window.

18 In the Metric Editor, click Save and Close.

19 In the Report Editor, click Save and Close.

20 In the Object Viewer, double-click the Compound Metric - Profit Margin report to run it.

21 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

Apply Smart Metric

22 On the Data menu, select Subtotals.

23 In the Subtotals window, on the Definition tab, under the Available subtotals list, select the Total check box.

24 Click OK.

Page 281: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Metrics 281

25 Scroll to the bottom of the report and notice the percentage total for the Profit Margin metric.

26 Right-click on the Profit Margin metric, and select Edit to calculate the meaningful Total value for the Profit Margin metric.

If a Report Editor warning window opens, Click OK to close the window.

27 In the Profit Margin - Metric Editor, click the Subtotals/Aggregation tab.

28 Below Description, select the Allow Smart Metric check box at the bottom left corner of the Metric Editor.

29 Click Save and Close.

30 In the Report Editor, click Save and Close.

31 In the Object Viewer, double-click the Compound Metric - Profit Margin report to run it.

32 Scroll to the bottom of the report and notice the change in the percentage total for the Profit Margin metric.

33 Close the Compound Metric - Profit Margin report.

Page 282: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

282 Exercises: Metrics © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Display Subtotals

Overview

There are several steps to this exercise. First, modify the Cost metric to disable the Total and Average subtotals for the metric. Second, create a new report using Item, Revenue, and Cost. Finally, display Average, Maximum, and Standard Deviation subtotals on the new report.

The first few rows of the report should look like the following:

Save the report as Item, Cost, and Revenue with Subtotals.

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

Disable Total and Average subtotals for the Cost metric

1 In the Folder List, select the My Metrics Exercises folder.

2 In the Object Viewer, right-click the Cost metric, and select Edit.

Page 283: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Metrics 283

3 In the Metric Editor, click the Subtotals / Aggregation tab.

4 In the Total subtotal function drop-down list, select None to disable the Total subtotal.

5 In the Available subtotals for metric list, select the Average subtotal and click < to move it to the Project subtotals list.

6 In the Metric Editor, click Save and Close.

Create a New Report

7 In the Folder List, select your My Reports Exercises folder.

8 On the File menu, point to New, and select Report.

9 In the New Grid window, leave Blank Report selected, and click OK.

10 In the Report Editor, in the Object Browser, double-click the Products hierarchy to expand it.

Page 284: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

284 Exercises: Metrics © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

11 Drag and drop Item into the rows in the template definition window.

12 In the Object Browser, in My Shortcuts, click My Personal Objects.

13 In the Object Browser, double-click the My Objects folder.

14 Double-click the My Metrics Exercises folder.

15 Drag and drop Revenue into the columns in the template definition window.

16 Drag and drop Cost into to the right of Revenue in the template definition window.

17 In the Report Editor, click Run.

Display Average, Maximum, and Standard Deviation subtotals

18 In the report, on the Data menu, select Subtotals.

Page 285: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Metrics 285

19 In the Subtotals window, on the Definition tab, select Average, Maximum, and Standard Deviation.

Notice the exclamation marks beside the Total and Average subtotals indicating that these subtotals are not available for all the metrics on the report, since you disabled both of them for the Cost metric.

20 Click the Display Options tab.

21 Under Subtotal positions by row, click Top of each level.

22 Click OK to close the Subtotals window.

23 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

24 In the report, click Save and Close.

25 In the Save Report As window, navigate to your My Reports Exercises folder.

26 Save the report as Item, Cost, and Revenue with Subtotals.

Page 286: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

286 Lesson Summary © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Lesson Summary

In this lesson you learned:

• Facts are values that represent business performance. They are typically numeric and they can be aggregated to produce meaningful results.

• Facts are stored in tables in the data warehouse. In a MicroStrategy project, you build fact schema objects that point to those tables that store fact data.

• A metric is an object you create in MicroStrategy Desktop that performs a calculation on a fact. A metric can employ everything from basic functions, like sum, average, or standard deviation to more advanced functions like moving average, correlation, or n-tiling.

• Metrics can belong to one of the following categories—Simple, Nested, Compound, and Derived.

• Simple metrics are the most basic metrics. You can use simple metrics to create other types of metrics.

• Nested metrics are metrics that perform multiple aggregations by placing one calculation formula inside, or “nested,” in another. They provide a convenient way to use metric functionality when tables in the data warehouse do not include data at the level needed for a specific type of analysis.

• Compound metrics are created by combining one or more metric objects with one or more mathematical operators or constants. You can create compound metrics using simple, nested, or other compound metrics.

• Metrics have the following components—Formula, Level (Dimensionality), Conditionality, and Transformation.

• Using the Format Cells window, you can specify formatting properties for a metric’s report header and for the numeric values it displays.

Page 287: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Metrics 6

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Lesson Summary 287

• After you define a metric formula, you can determine which subtotals are available for the metric. By default, all subtotals are available.

• You should select the Allow Smart Metric check box any time strictly summing the metric values does not produce a meaningful Total subtotal value.

Page 288: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Metrics MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials6

288 Lesson Summary © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Page 289: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 289

7MICROSTRATEGY OLAP SERVICES

Lesson Description

This lesson describes the functionality provided by MicroStrategy OLAP Services, an optional, add-on application to Intelligence Server, that enables you to enhance the power of the reports you create in MicroStrategy Desktop.

Page 290: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy OLAP Services MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials7

290 Lesson Objectives © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

Describe the features provided by MicroStrategy OLAP Services, including report objects, view filters, and derived metrics. Use the Report Objects window, and create view filters and derived metrics in reports.

After completing the topics in this lesson, you will be able to:

• List the types of analysis that are provided by OLAP Services. (Page 291)

• Add and remove objects to and from the template and the Report Objects window. (Page 292)

• Create view filters. (Page 296)

• Create derived metrics. (Page 299)

Page 291: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy OLAP Services 7

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Introduction to OLAP Services 291

Introduction to OLAP Services

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

List the types of analysis that are provided by OLAP Services.

MicroStrategy OLAP Services is an add-on product to Intelligence Server. While this product is not required to develop reports, the functionality it provides can greatly enhance the type of analysis you can achieve with your reports.

This product provides MicroStrategy customers with the following types of analysis—cube analysis, derived elements, in-memory OLAP with the use of report objects, view filters, and derived metrics.

In this lesson you will learn more about report objects, view filters, and derived metrics.

For more information on cube analysis and derived elements, refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

Page 292: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy OLAP Services MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials7

292 Report Objects © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Report Objects

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Add and remove objects to and from the template and the Report Objects window.

With MicroStrategy OLAP Services, you gain an important design feature—the ability to add attributes and metrics to a report definition without having them be displayed on the template. The SQL query for such a report retrieves data for all objects of the report definition (whether or not they are displayed on the template) and stores it in a report cache. Users can then drag and drop additional objects onto the template of the report without generating any new SQL or querying the data warehouse. The data for the objects is simply retrieved from the report cache that was created when the report was first executed, resulting in faster response times for users and less traffic to and from the data warehouse.

The Report Objects window displays all of the objects that are part of the report definition and hence, retrieved from the data warehouse and stored in the report cache. The following image shows how you can have many attributes and metrics in the Report Objects window that are not displayed on the template or the initial report view:

Report Objects Window with Many Attributes and Metrics

Page 293: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy OLAP Services 7

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Report Objects 293

Objects that are displayed on the template appear in boldface type in the Report Objects window, while those not appearing on the template appear in plain text type.

Methods for Adding Report Objects

When adding objects to a report, you can either add them so they are displayed after the report is run, or you can add them so they are included in the SQL generated when the report is run, but do not appear in the initial report view. With the second option, after the report has run, you can add and remove those objects to and from the report view without regenerating any SQL. You can add an object to a report using either of the following methods:

• In the report, drag and drop objects from the Object Browser onto the template or the Report Objects window.

If the object is placed in the template definition window, it is displayed when the report is run. If the object is placed in the Report Objects window, it is included in the generated SQL, but is not initially displayed when the report is run.

• In the report, right-click an object in the Object Browser, and select Add to Rows, Add to Columns, Add to Page-by, or Add to Report Objects.

With MicroStrategy OLAP Services, when attributes are added to the Report Objects window, they look like the following:

Report Objects Window

Page 294: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy OLAP Services MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials7

294 Report Objects © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

In the above example, notice the “+” sign next to the attributes. By clicking the “+” sign, you expand an attribute to view its attribute forms (for example, the Customer attribute). You can then easily drag and drop specific attribute forms of the attribute onto the template. For example, to view just the last names of customers in the initial report view, simply drag the Last Name attribute form of the Customer attribute from the Report Objects window onto the template.

As with objects, attribute forms that are displayed on the template appear in boldface type in the Report Objects window, while those not appearing on the template appear in plain text type.

Methods for Removing Report Objects

When removing an object from a report, you can remove the object from the report definition entirely, or you can remove it only from the report view, while keeping it in the Report Objects window and part of the report definition.

You can remove objects from the report definition entirely using the following methods:

• In a report, drag and drop an object from the template or the Report Objects window into the Object Browser. Since you are changing the report definition, new SQL will need to be generated.

• In a report, right-click an object on the template or in the Report Objects window and select Remove from Report. Again, since you are changing the report definition, new SQL will need to be generated.

The Remove from Report option is available without MicroStrategy OLAP Services.

Page 295: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy OLAP Services 7

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Report Objects 295

You can remove objects from the report view, while keeping them in the Report Objects window using the following methods:

• In a report, drag and drop an object from the template to the Report Objects window. If you want to add the object back to the template, you can do so at any time without regenerating any SQL.

• In a report, right-click an object header on the template, and select Remove from Grid. Again, if you want to add the object back to the template, you can do so at any time without regenerating any SQL.

The Remove from Grid option is only available with MicroStrategy OLAP Services.

Page 296: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy OLAP Services MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials7

296 View Filters © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

View Filters

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Create view filters.

A view filter enables you to further narrow down a report view, using only those objects in the Report Objects window, (even if they are not displayed on the template). When you add or change a view filter, the original report filter remains intact. (Recall that report filter conditions are applied in the SQL of a report when the report is run.) Only after a report result set is retrieved are the view filter conditions applied, so only a subset of the report results is displayed in the report view.

Another key difference between report filters and view filters is that view filter conditions of a report are local to that report. In other words, view filter conditions cannot be reused or shared across reports like report filters. View filters can, however, be saved with the report definition.

For example, the following report has Region and Call Center in the rows and Revenue in the columns of the report view:

Regional Call Centers Revenue Report

Page 297: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy OLAP Services 7

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. View Filters 297

The View Filter window, which is shown above the report, enables you to create view filter conditions.

To create a view filter:

1 In a report, if the View Filter window is not already showing, on the View menu, select View Filter.

2 In the View Filter window, click Click here to start a new qualification.

The View Filter window displays three parameters for creating view filter conditions—Field, Operator, and Value.

3 Click Field to display a drop-down list of objects that exist in your Report Objects window.

4 Select the object with which you want to create the view filter condition.

If you select an attribute, you will have the option to qualify on any attribute form that is being displayed in the report view or to choose from a list of attribute elements.

5 Select the desired operator from the drop-down list.

The list of operators will vary depending on your selection for the Field parameter.

6 Manually type in a value, select a value from a list of elements, or compare the object you selected to another object in the Report Objects window.

The list of options will vary depending on your selection for the Field parameter.

Page 298: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy OLAP Services MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials7

298 View Filters © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

7 Click Apply to apply your view filter condition to the report view, as shown below:

View Filter Applied to Report

There is also an Auto-Apply changes check box that, when selected, no longer requires you to manually click Apply every time you modify or create a new view filter condition, as shown below:

Auto-Apply Changes

8 To create additional view filter conditions, click New and repeat steps 3-7.

When you have multiple view filter conditions, the default set operator is AND. Click a set operator and select AND, AND NOT, OR, or OR NOT to change it. For more information on set operators, see “Set Operators” starting on page 230.

To remove all the view filter conditions, click Clear, followed by Apply. To remove a specific view filter condition, right-click the view filter condition, and select Remove qualification.

Page 299: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy OLAP Services 7

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Derived Metrics 299

Derived Metrics

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Create derived metrics.

Derived metrics are metrics you can create within a report, using only those objects in the Report Objects window (even if they are not displayed on the template), as well as functions and operators.

In their structure, derived metrics:

• May include one or more functions and operators

• Are based on the attributes and metrics in the Report Objects window

• May be simple or compound, and therefore will inherit the characteristics of whichever type you create.

For more information on the characteristics of simple and compound metrics, see “Metric Creation” starting on page 257.

For example, if you have a report with Call Center, Unit Price, and Units Sold in its definition, you can create the following derived metrics:

[Unit Price] * [Units Sold]

Count (Call Center) {~}

Just like with view filters, derived metrics are local to the report in which they are created. In other words, when you create a derived metric on a report, it is not a metric object that is available for use in other reports. You can, however, save derived metrics to the report definition.

Page 300: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy OLAP Services MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials7

300 Derived Metrics © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To create a derived metric:

1 Open a report in Grid view.

2 On the Insert menu, select New Metric.

3 In the Input Metric Formula window, in the Metric Name box, enter a name for the derived metric.

4 In the right-hand window, define the derived metric formula using the available objects in the Report Objects folder combined with functions and operators.

Derived Metric Formula

Just like in the Metric Editor, you can also use the Insert Function Wizard to define a derived metric formula.

5 In the Input Metric Formula window, click OK to add the derived metric to the report template or the report view.

6 To format the derived metric, right-click its header, and select Formatting.

Once a derived metric is created, you can remove it from the report display like you would any other object.

Page 301: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy OLAP Services 7

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Derived Metrics 301

Built-In Derived Metrics

Another great benefit of MicroStrategy OLAP Services is built-in derived metrics. Many common metrics that are typically defined in terms of other metrics are available from the Insert menu when you have MicroStrategy OLAP Services.

By selecting a metric header in your report view, and then clicking the Insert menu, you can insert a derived Percent to Total, Transformation, or Rank metric based on your selected metric.

Built-In Derived Metrics

Built-in derived metrics are also referred to as shortcut metrics.

Page 302: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy OLAP Services MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials7

302 Exercises: MicroStrategy OLAP Services © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Exercises: MicroStrategy OLAP Services

Using the Report Objects Window to Add Attributes

Overview

Create a simple report with a report filter for June 2008 and use the Report Objects window to include attributes and metrics in the report definition without displaying them on the template. The first few rows of the initial report results should look like the following:

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In the MicroStrategy Tutorial project, in the Folder List, select the My Reports Exercises folder.

2 On the File menu, point to New, and select Report.

Page 303: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy OLAP Services 7

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: MicroStrategy OLAP Services 303

3 In the New Grid window, keep Blank Report selected, and click OK.

4 In the Report Editor, in the Object Browser, double-click the Customers hierarchy to expand it.

5 Drag and drop Customer, Customer City, Income Bracket, and Payment Method into the Report objects window.

If you do not see the Report objects window, on the View menu, select Report Objects.

6 Click View contents one level up to return to the list of hierarchies.

7 Double-click the Geography hierarchy to expand it.

8 Drag and drop Region, Call Center, and Country into the Report objects window.

9 Click View contents one level up to return to the list of hierarchies.

10 Double-click the Time hierarchy to expand it.

11 Drag and drop Year, Month, Quarter, and Day into the Report objects window.

12 In My Shortcuts, click Public Objects.

13 Double-click the Metrics folder.

14 Double-click the Sales Metrics folder.

15 In the Object Browser, drag and drop Revenue, Profit, Profit Margin, and Cost into the Report Objects window.

Page 304: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy OLAP Services MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials7

304 Exercises: MicroStrategy OLAP Services © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

16 In the Report Objects window, drag and drop Year, Region, Call Center, Customer Last Name, Revenue, and Profit, and arrange them in the template definition window as shown below:

To drag the Customer Last Name attribute form to the template, you need to expand the Customer attribute in the Report objects window.

17 In the Object Browser, in My Shortcuts, click Data Explorer.

18 In the Object Browser, double-click the Time hierarchy to expand it.

19 Double-click the Month attribute to expand it.

20 Drag and drop Jun 2008 into the report filter definition window.

21 In the Report Editor, on the View menu, select Grid View.

22 On the Grid menu, select Merge Row Header Cells.

23 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

24 Practice dragging attributes from the Report Objects window to the template and vice versa, and notice that no SQL is generated by your actions.

25 In the report, click Save and Close.

26 In the Save Report As window, navigate to your My Reports Exercises folder, and save the report as Using Report Objects.

Page 305: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy OLAP Services 7

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: MicroStrategy OLAP Services 305

Using View Filters

Overview

Create a simple report with an empty report filter and use the view filter to narrow down your report view. The report should contain Category, Subcategory, Year, and Revenue on the template. The final report should look like the following:

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In Desktop, in the Folder List, select your My Reports Exercises folder.

2 On the File menu, point to New, and select Report.

3 In the New Grid window, keep Blank Report selected, and click OK.

4 In the Report Editor, in the Object Browser, double-click the Products hierarchy.

5 Drag and drop Category and Subcategory into the rows of the template definition window.

Page 306: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy OLAP Services MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials7

306 Exercises: MicroStrategy OLAP Services © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

6 In the Object Browser, click View contents one level up.

7 Double-click the Time hierarchy to expand it.

8 Drag and drop Year into the columns of the template definition window.

9 In My Shortcuts, click Public Objects.

10 In the Object Browser, double-click the Metrics folder.

11 Double-click the Sales Metrics folder.

12 Drag and drop Revenue below Year in the columns of the template definition window. Your template should now look like the following image:

13 In the Report Editor, on the View menu, select Grid View to run the report.

14 If you do not see the View Filter window, in the report, on the View menu, select View Filter.

15 In the View Filter window, select the Auto-Apply changes check box.

16 In the View Filter window, click Click here to start a new qualification.

17 Click Field, and select Category.

18 In the Operator drop-down list, select In list.

19 In the Value drop-down list, select Select Elements.

Page 307: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy OLAP Services 7

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: MicroStrategy OLAP Services 307

20 In the Select elements for the qualification from the list below window, in the Available objects list, hold down SHIFT on the keyboard and select Books and Electronics from the Available objects list.

21 Click > to add them to the Selected objects list.

22 Click OK to close the Select elements for the qualification from the list below window.

23 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

24 In the Report, click Save and Close.

25 In the Save Report As window, navigate to your My Report Exercises folder, and save the report as Using View Filters.

Page 308: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy OLAP Services MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials7

308 Exercises: MicroStrategy OLAP Services © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Create and Format a Derived Metric—Growth

Overview

In this exercise, you will create and format a derived metric named Growth and use it on a new report. You will use the Revenue and Last Year’s Revenue metrics in the derived metric’s formula. The final report should look like the following:

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

1 In Desktop, in the Folder List, select the My Reports Exercises folder.

2 In the Object Viewer, right-click a blank area, point to New, and select Report.

3 In the New Grid window, keep Blank Report selected, and click OK.

Page 309: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy OLAP Services 7

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: MicroStrategy OLAP Services 309

4 In the Report Editor, in the Object Browser, double-click the Geography hierarchy to expand it.

5 Drag and drop Call Center into the rows of the template definition window.

6 In the Object Browser, in My Shortcuts, click My Personal Objects.

7 In the Object Browser, double-click the My Objects folder.

8 Double-click the My Metrics Exercises folder.

9 Drag and drop the Revenue metric into the columns of the template definition window.

10 In the Object Browser, in My Shortcuts, click Public Objects.

11 In the Object Browser, double-click the Metrics folder.

12 Double-click the Sales Metrics folder.

13 Double-click the Transformation Sales Metrics folder.

14 Drag and drop the Last Year’s Revenue metric to the right of Revenue in the template definition window.

15 In the Object Browser, in My Shortcuts, click Data Explorer.

16 In the Object Browser, double-click the Time hierarchy to expand it.

17 Double-click Year to expand it.

18 Drag and drop 2009 into the Report Filter definition window.

Page 310: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy OLAP Services MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials7

310 Exercises: MicroStrategy OLAP Services © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

19 In the Report Editor, on the View menu, select Grid View to run the report. The report results should look like the following:

20 In the report, on the Insert menu, select New Metric.

21 In the Input Metric Formula window, drag and drop Revenue from the Report objects folder on the left into the window on the right.

22 Click the subtraction operator (-) button.

23 Drag and drop Last Year’s Revenue from the Report objects folder on the left to the right of the subtraction operator (-) in the window on the right. Notice that parentheses are automatically added around Revenue-[Last Year’s Revenue].

24 Click the division operator (/) button.

25 Drag and drop Last Year’s Revenue from the Report objects folder on the left to the right of the division operator (/) in the window on the right.

Page 311: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy OLAP Services 7

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: MicroStrategy OLAP Services 311

The parentheses play a crucial role in the order of operations because calculations in parentheses are performed before other calculations in the metric formula. You need to divide Last Year’s Revenue into the difference between Revenue and Last Year’s Revenue. Without parentheses, the division would occur first, producing undesired derived metric values.

26 In the Metric Name box, type Growth as the name of your derived metric. The Input Metric formula window should now look like the image below:

27 In the Input Metric formula window, click OK to add Growth to the report view.

28 In the report, right-click the Growth metric header, point to Formatting, and select Growth Values.

29 In the Format Cells window, on the Number tab, select Percent.

30 Click OK to close the Format Cells window.

31 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

32 In the report, click Save and Close.

Page 312: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy OLAP Services MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials7

312 Exercises: MicroStrategy OLAP Services © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

33 In the Save Report As window, navigate to the My Reports Exercises folder, and save the report as Growth Data.

Page 313: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy OLAP Services 7

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Lesson Summary 313

Lesson Summary

In this lesson you learned:

• MicroStrategy OLAP Services is an add-on product to Intelligence Server. This product provides MicroStrategy customers with the following analysis: cube analysis, derived elements, in-Memory OLAP with the use of report objects, view filters, and derived metrics.

• With MicroStrategy OLAP Services, you gain an important design feature—the ability to add attributes and metrics to a report definition without having them be displayed on the template. The SQL query for such a report retrieves data for all objects of the report definition and stores it in a report cache.

• The Report Objects window displays all of the objects that are part of the report definition and hence, retrieved from the data warehouse and stored in the report cache.

• A view filter enables you to further narrow down a report view, using only those objects in the Report Objects window.

• When you add or change a view filter, the original report filter remains intact. Only after a report result set is retrieved are the view filter conditions applied, so only a subset of the report results is displayed in the report view.

• Derived metrics are metrics you can create with the Report Editor, using only those objects in the Report Objects window.

Page 314: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy OLAP Services MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials7

314 Lesson Summary © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Page 315: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 315

8PROMPTS AND SEARCHES

Lesson Description

This lesson explains how to create and use prompts and searches. Prompts are powerful objects that you can incorporate into a report. With prompts, you can create reports that allow end-users to define the report content at run time. In this way, you can create fewer reports, while still satisfying the requirements of many users.

In addition, this lesson describes how to search for objects in MicroStrategy Desktop. As you may have already noticed, the number of objects in a project can multiply rapidly, and the ability to search for objects can be quite useful.

Prompts and searches can also be used in combination with each other to help manage a reporting environment that changes dynamically as objects are created and deleted.

Page 316: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

316 Lesson Objectives © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

Define the different types of prompts, and explain how you can use search objects inside prompts. Create prompts and searches in MicroStrategy Desktop.

After completing the topics in this lesson, you will be able to:

• Explain the purpose of a prompt. Define the different types of prompts. Use the Prompt Generation Wizard to create the different types of prompts. (Page 317)

• Create the four types of filter definition prompts, and use them in reports. (Page 323)

• Create and use object prompts in a report. (Page 338)

• Create and use value prompts. (Page 344)

• Create prompts on the fly within the Report Editor. (Page 349)

• Use the Re-prompt report button to modify prompt answers in a prompted report. (Page 351)

• Choose the appropriate settings when saving a report containing prompt objects in its definition. (Page 352)

• Use various search criteria to search for objects in a MicroStrategy project. Use the results of a search object in a prompt object. (Page 358)

Page 317: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. What Is a Prompt? 317

What Is a Prompt?

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Explain the purpose of a prompt. Define the different types of prompts. Use the Prompt Generation Wizard to create the different types of prompts.

Prompts are used to dynamically modify the contents of a report. With prompts, you can determine, at run time, the objects you want to retrieve for the report and report filtering conditions. In addition, you can make different prompt selections each time you run the report. Prompts provide the following advantages:

• With prompts, your report has almost unlimited flexibility. One report definition can serve many different purposes, depending on the prompt answers you choose at run time.

• With prompts, fewer report objects are necessary because one prompted report can fulfill many different needs.

• With prompts, you can choose different prompt answers every time you run the report, enabling quick and easy comparisons of data.

For example, you can create a prompt for filtering criteria that qualifies on the Year attribute. When you run a report with this prompt in its report filter, you are asked to select which year’s data you want to see. You can run the report the first time by selecting 2008, and run it a second time by selecting 2009.

Page 318: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

318 What Is a Prompt? © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Creating Prompts

You create all types of prompts with the Prompt Generation Wizard, which guides you through the prompt creation process, as shown below:

Prompt Creation Wizard

You can control several aspects of how prompts appear and how they function, including the following:

• Types of prompts

• General information for the prompts

• Default prompt answers

Types of Prompts

Using the following prompt types, you can create a prompt for nearly every part of a report:

• Filter definition prompt—Enables you to select filtering criteria from hierarchies, attributes, attribute element lists, and metrics.

• Object prompt—Enables you to select objects to include in a report, such as attributes, metrics, custom groups, template objects, report filter objects, and so forth.

Page 319: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. What Is a Prompt? 319

• Value prompt—Enables you to select a single value on which to qualify such as a date, number, or text string. A value prompt is not directly placed in a report. Instead, you embed it in an attribute or metric qualification.

You can also place value prompts in metric formulas to make metric calculations dynamic.

• Level prompt—Enables you to specify the level for a metric. A level prompt is not directly placed in a report. Instead, you embed it in a metric object.

For more information on level prompts refer to the MicroStrategy Desktop: Advanced Reporting course.

General Information for the Prompts

After selecting the type of prompt, the next step on creating a prompt is defining general characteristics for the prompt.

The image below shows all the options available in this phase of the prompt creation:

Prompt Creation Options

Page 320: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

320 What Is a Prompt? © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Title and Instructions

You can customize the title and instructions of a prompt, both of which are displayed to end-users when they are answering the prompt.

Web Options

You can define how the prompt appears when it is executed in MicroStrategy Web. Click Modify to open the Web Options window, which displays options for prompt style, style properties, and defining the qualification.

The image below displays the Web Options window for a hierarchy prompt:

Web Options Window

Page 321: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. What Is a Prompt? 321

Save and Reuse Prompt Answers

This determines if personal answers can be saved for this prompt. Personal answers allow a user to save prompt answers for this prompt, and then reuse the answers on any report that this prompt is used on.

For more information on saving and reusing prompt answers, see “Save and Reuse Prompt Answers” starting on page 353.

Limit Elements for Selection and Amount of Prompt Answers

You can also specify a minimum or maximum number of prompt answers allowed.

Required Answers

You can indicate whether a prompt answer is required or optional. A required prompt requires an answer to be selected, or the report will not run. An optional prompt does not require an answer to be selected.

To specify answer requirements, select or clear the Prompt answer required check box on the last screen of the Prompt Generation Wizard.

Page 322: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

322 What Is a Prompt? © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Default Prompt Answers

You can specify default prompt answers for end-users, which they can modify at run time. The image below shows the page on the Prompt Generation Wizard where you define default prompt answers:

Default Prompt Answers

Page 323: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Filter Definition Prompts 323

Filter Definition Prompts

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Create the four types of filter definition prompts, and use them in reports.

Filter definition prompts are used within report filters to specify conditions that data must meet to be included in report results.

Creating Filter Definition Prompts

You can choose from the following types of filter definition prompts:

• Choose from all attributes in a hierarchy—Enables you to qualify on any attribute or attribute element that belongs to the specified hierarchy

Choose from All Attributes in a Hierarchy

Page 324: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

324 Filter Definition Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• Qualify on an attribute—Enables you to qualify on the attribute forms or the attribute elements of the specified attribute

Qualify on an Attribute

Page 325: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Filter Definition Prompts 325

• Choose from an attribute element list—Enables you to qualify on a list of attribute elements of the specified attribute

Choose from an Attribute Element List

Page 326: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

326 Filter Definition Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• Qualify on a metric—Enables you to qualify on the specified metric

Qualify on a Metric

The procedures for creating each of these types of filter definition prompts are described in the following sections.

Choose from All Attributes in a Hierarchy

You have several options when you select the Choose from all attributes in a hierarchy filter definition prompt. You can prompt the user to qualify on any attribute from a specific hierarchy, any attribute that is returned by a specific search object, or any attribute from any hierarchy that exists in the MicroStrategy project.

For more information on searches, see “What Is a Search Object?” starting on page 358.

Only the option to qualify on any attribute from a specific hierarchy is described below, but the procedures for creating the other types of hierarchy prompts are similar.

Page 327: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Filter Definition Prompts 327

To create a choose from all attributes in a hierarchy prompt:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the File menu, point to New, and select Prompt.

2 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, click Filter definition prompt.

3 In the list of filter definition prompts, select Choose from all attributes in a hierarchy, and click Next.

4 On the Reduce number of hierarchies available at runtime page, click Choose a hierarchy object.

5 Click Browse.

6 In the Open window, select the one hierarchy you want to use in the prompt, and click OK.

7 On the Reduce number of hierarchies available at runtime page, click Next.

8 On the Provide general information for the prompt page, in the Display properties session, define the following settings:

• In the Title box, type a title for the prompt.

• In the Instructions box, type instructions so the users understand which choices they have to make when answering the prompt.

• Click Modify to change the display style of the prompt in MicroStrategy Web.

• In the Personal answers allowed drop-down list, select from None, Single, or Multiple.

For more information about saving and reusing prompt answers, see “Save and Reuse Prompt Answers” starting on page 353.

Page 328: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

328 Filter Definition Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

9 In the Prompt Restrictions section, define the following settings:

• Select the Maximum number of elements for selection check box if you want to specify the maximum number of attribute elements a user is allowed to select per qualification. For example, a user is qualifying on the Year attribute, and he is selecting from a list that contains the following elements—2007, 2008, and 2009. If this setting is set to 2, the user can only select two (or less) of these year elements.

This setting is available only for two types of filter qualification prompts: Choose from all elements in a hierarchy and Qualify on an attribute.

• Select the Minimum number of qualifications check box if you want to specify the minimum amount of qualifications allowed, then set that number.

• Select the Maximum number of qualifications check box if you want to specify a maximum amount of qualifications allowed, then set that number.

• Select the Prompt answer required check box if you want to require users to answer the prompt before running the report.

If you select Prompt answer required without providing default answers, the report cannot execute on a schedule.

10 Click Next.

11 On the Select default prompt answer(s) page, click Add to define default answers for the prompt.

Defining default answers for prompts is optional. To skip this step, click Finish.

12 In the Qualification Editor, select default answers to the prompt, and click Save and Close.

13 On the Select default prompt answer (s) page, click Finish.

14 In the Save As window, navigate to the location in which you want to save the prompt.

Page 329: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Filter Definition Prompts 329

15 Type a name for the prompt, and click Save.

Qualify on an Attribute

This type of filter definition prompt can be used to create a more focused prompt than the hierarchy prompt. After creating this type of filter definition prompt, the user can qualify on only the attribute built into the prompt (rather than from any attribute in a hierarchy) or any attribute that is returned by a specific search object.

Only the option to qualify on the attribute built into the prompt is described below, but the procedure for creating the other type of attribute prompts is similar.

To create a qualify on an attribute prompt:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the File menu, point to New, and select Prompt.

2 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, click Filter definition prompt.

3 In the list of filter definition prompts, select Qualify on an attribute and, click Next.

4 On the Select an attribute or an attribute search object to be used in the prompt page, click Choose an attribute.

5 Click Browse.

6 In the Open window, select the attribute you want to use in the prompt, and click OK.

7 On the Select an attribute or an attribute search object to be used in the prompt page, in the Displayed forms drop-down list, select what attribute forms should be displayed for the attribute qualification. You can select to display All attribute forms of the attribute, just its Browse forms, its Report Display forms, or Custom Forms.

Page 330: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

330 Filter Definition Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

If you select Custom Forms, click Select Forms to select from a list of available attribute forms for that attribute.

8 Click Next.

9 On the Provide General Information for the Prompt page, in the Display properties session, define the following settings:

• In the Title box, type a title for the prompt.

• In the Instructions box, type instructions so the users understand which choices they have to make when answering the prompt.

• Click Modify to change the display style of the prompt in MicroStrategy Web.

• In the Personal answers allowed drop-down list, select from None, Single, or Multiple.

For more information about saving and reusing prompt answers, see “Save and Reuse Prompt Answers” starting on page 353.

10 In the Prompt Restrictions section, define the following settings:

• Select the Maximum number of elements for selection check box if you want to specify the maximum number of attribute elements a user is allowed to select per qualification. For example, a user is qualifying on the Year attribute, and he is selecting from a list that contains the following elements—2007, 2008, and 2009. If this setting is set to 2, the user can only select two (or less) of these year elements.

This setting is available only for two types of filter qualification prompts: Choose from all elements in a hierarchy and Qualify on an attribute.

• Select the Minimum number of qualifications check box if you want to specify the minimum amount of qualifications allowed, then set that number.

• Select the Maximum number of qualifications check box if you want to specify a maximum amount of qualifications allowed, then set that number.

Page 331: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Filter Definition Prompts 331

• Select the Prompt answer required check box if you want to require users to answer the prompt before running the report.

If you select Prompt answer required without providing default answers, the report cannot execute on a schedule.

11 Click Next.

12 On the Select default prompt answer(s) page, click Add to define default answers for the prompt.

Defining default answers for prompts is optional. To skip this step, click Finish.

13 In the Qualification Editor, select default answers to the prompt, and click Save and Close.

14 On the Select default prompt answer(s) page, click Finish.

15 In the Save As window, navigate to the location in which you want to save the prompt.

16 Type a name, and click Save.

Choose from an Attribute Element List

This type of filter definition prompt can be used to create a prompt that requires users to select from a list of attribute elements to answer the prompt. You have the choice of presenting them with the entire attribute element list, using an existing report filter object to narrow down the attribute element list, or creating a custom attribute element list.

Only the option to present users with the entire attribute element list is described below, but the procedures for creating the other types of attribute element prompts are similar.

Page 332: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

332 Filter Definition Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To create a choose from an attribute element list prompt:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the File menu, point to New, and select Prompt.

2 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, click Filter definition prompt.

3 In the list of filter definition prompts, select Choose from an attribute element list, and click Next.

4 On the Select the attribute you want to use in the prompt page, in the Attribute box, either type the attribute name or click Browse to select the attribute.

5 Click Next.

6 On the Reduce the number of elements available to the user at runtime page, select from the following options:

List all elements (no restriction)—Displays all of the attribute elements. Users can select any or all of these elements.

Use a filter to reduce the number of elements—Enables you to restrict which elements to display, by setting conditions that the data must meet. Do one of the following:

• Enter a filter name.

• Click Browse to select a filter.

Once you have chosen a filter, click Preview to display the results of the selected filter on the selected attribute.

Use a pre-defined list of elements—Select specific attribute elements to display for users at runtime. Use the buttons described below to create the list:

• Add—Opens the Select Objects window, which enables you to select the elements for the list.

Page 333: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Filter Definition Prompts 333

Once an element has been selected, this button is replaced by Modify, which opens the Select Elements window so you can select additional elements.

• Remove—Deletes the selected element from the list.

• Clear—Deletes all the elements in the list.

The Up and Down arrows move the selected element to change the order that the elements are displayed in the prompt.

7 Click Next to access the General Information page.

8 On the Provide general information for the prompt page, in the Display properties session, define the following settings:

• In the Title box, type a title for the prompt.

• In the Instructions box, type instructions so the users understand which choices they have to make when answering the prompt.

• Click Modify to change the display style of the prompt in MicroStrategy Web.

• In the Personal answers allowed drop-down list, select from None, Single, or Multiple.

For more information about saving and reusing prompt answers, see “Save and Reuse Prompt Answers” starting on page 353.

9 In the Prompt Restrictions section, define the following settings:

• Select the Minimum number of answers check box if you want to set the minimum amount of attribute elements a user is allowed to select, then set that number.

• Select the Maximum number of answers check box if you want to set the maximum amount of attribute elements a user is allowed to select, then set that number.

Page 334: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

334 Filter Definition Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• Select the Prompt answer required check box if you want to require users to answer the prompt before running the report.

If you select Prompt answer required without providing default answers, the report cannot execute on a schedule.

10 Click Next.

11 On the Select default prompt answer(s) page, click Add to define default answers for the prompt.

Defining default answers for prompts is optional. To skip this step, click Finish.

12 In the Select Objects window, select default answers to the prompt, and click OK.

13 On the Select default prompt answer(s) page, click Finish.

14 In the Save As window, navigate to the location in which you want to save the prompt.

15 Type a name, and click Save.

Qualify on a Metric

This type of filter definition prompt can be used to create a prompt that enables a user to qualify on a metric. The user can qualify on the metric built into the prompt or any metric that is returned by a specific search object. Users can qualify on the value, rank, or percentage of the metric.

Only the option to qualify on the metric built into the prompt is described below, but the procedure for creating the other types of metric prompt is similar.

To create a qualify on a metric prompt:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the File menu, point to New, and select Prompt.

Page 335: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Filter Definition Prompts 335

2 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, click Filter definition prompt.

3 In the list of filter definition prompts, select Qualify on a metric, and click Next.

4 On the Select a metric or metric search object to be used in the prompt page, select from the following options:

• Choose a metric object—Either type the metric name in the box, or click Browse to select a metric.

• Use the result of a search object—Enables you to use a search object to define the list of metrics to display in the prompt.

• Use a pre-defined list of metrics—Select specific metrics to display for users at runtime. Use the buttons described below to create the list:

– Add—Opens the Select Objects window, which enables you to select the objects for the list

Once an element has been selected, this button is replaced by Modify, which opens the Select Objects window so you can modify the previous selection.

– Remove—Deletes the selected objects from the list

– Clear—Deletes all the objects from the list

The Up and Down arrows move the selected element to change the order that the elements are displayed in the prompt.

5 Click Next to access the General Information page.

6 On the Provide general information for the prompt page, in the Display properties session, define the following settings:

• In the Title box, type a title for the prompt.

• In the Instructions box, type instructions so the users understand which choices they have to make when answering the prompt.

• Click Modify to change the display style of the prompt in MicroStrategy Web.

Page 336: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

336 Filter Definition Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• In the Personal answers allowed drop-down list, select from None, Single, or Multiple.

For more information about saving and reusing prompt answers, see “Save and Reuse Prompt Answers” starting on page 353.

7 In the Prompt Restrictions section, define the following settings:

• Select the Minimum number of qualifications check box if you want to specify the minimum amount of qualifications allowed, then set that number.

• Select the Maximum number of qualifications check box if you want to specify a maximum amount of qualifications allowed, then set that number.

• Select the Prompt answer required check box if you want to require users to answer the prompt before running the report.

If you select Prompt answer required without providing default answers, the report cannot execute on a schedule.

8 Click Next.

9 On the Select default prompt answer(s) page, click Add to define default answers for the prompt.

Defining default answers for prompts is optional. To skip this step, click Finish.

10 In the Qualification Editor, select default answers to the prompt, and click Save and Close.

11 On the Select default prompt answer(s) page, click Finish.

12 In the Save As window, navigate to the location in which you want to save the prompt.

13 Type a name, and click Save.

Page 337: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Filter Definition Prompts 337

Using Filter Definition Prompts in a Report

To use a filter definition prompt, you must include it in a report filter object or in the report filter definition window of a report.

To build a report with a filter definition prompt:

1 In the Report Editor, in the Object Browser, locate the filter definition prompt you want to use, and drag and drop it into the report filter definition window.

You can also drag and drop it into the report filter definition window of the Filter Editor.

2 Add more report filter conditions if desired.

3 Save the report.

When you run the report, a window that looks similar to the Filter Editor appears. If the filter definition prompt is required, you must answer (resolve) the prompt before the report runs.

To resolve a filter definition prompt:

1 Run a report containing a filter definition prompt.

2 The next actions you take depend on the type of filter definition prompt in the report, but they are very similar to what you would do in the Filter Editor to define a report filter condition.

For more information on defining report filter conditions, see “Types of Report Filters” starting on page 222.

3 Click Finish to run the report with your prompt answers.

In the Report Details window, you can see your prompt answers in the form of report filtering conditions.

Page 338: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

338 Object Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Object Prompts

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Create and use object prompts in a report.

Object prompts can be used to create a prompt on almost any type of MicroStrategy object. For example, you can prompt on a list of metrics or attributes to place on a template, or you can prompt on a list of report filter objects to apply to a metric. Object prompts enable you to create very versatile reports.

With an object prompt you can qualify on a specified list of MicroStrategy objects or any MicroStrategy object that is returned by a search object. The following is an object prompt that enables the user to select from a specified list of metrics to place on a template:

Object Prompt

Only the option to qualify on a specified list of MicroStrategy objects is described below, but the procedure for creating the other types of object prompts is similar.

Page 339: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Object Prompts 339

Creating Object Prompts

To create an object prompt:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the File menu, point to New, and select Prompt.

2 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, click Object prompt.

3 Click Next.

4 On the Reduce the number of objects available to the user at runtime page, select from the following options:

• Use a pre-defined list of objects—Select specific objects to display for users at runtime. Use the buttons described below to create the list:

– Add—Opens the Select Objects window, which enables you to select the objects for the list

Once an element has been selected, this button is replaced by Modify, which opens the Select Objects window so you can modify the previous selection.

– Remove—Deletes the selected objects from the list

– Clear—Deletes all the objects from the list

The Up and Down arrows move the selected element to change the order that the objects are displayed in the prompt.

• Use the result of a search object—Enables you to use a search object to define the list of objects to display in the prompt.

For more information on using search objects, see “What Is a Search Object?” starting on page 358.

– The Display using folder structure check box shows the object path (folder hierarchy). This option, available for search objects only, is useful when the same object with the same name is saved in multiple folders.

Page 340: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

340 Object Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

You can only use objects of the same type in one object prompt. For example, you can include metrics or attributes in an object prompt, but not both. If you want to prompt for multiple object types in the same report, you have to create an object prompt for each object type.

5 On the Provide general information for the prompt page, in the Display properties session, define the following settings:

• In the Title box, type a title for the prompt.

• In the Instructions box, type instructions so the users understand which choices they have to make when answering the prompt.

• Click Modify to change the display style of the prompt in MicroStrategy Web.

• In the Personal answers allowed drop-down list, select from None, Single, or Multiple.

For more information about saving and reusing prompt answers, see “Save and Reuse Prompt Answers” starting on page 353.

6 In the Prompt Restrictions section, define the following settings:

• Select the Minimum objects check box if you want to specify the minimum amount of objects a user is allowed to select, then set that number.

• Select the Maximum objects check box if you want to specify a maximum amount of objects a user is allowed to select, then set that number.

• Select the Prompt answer required check box if you want to require users to answer the prompt before running the report.

If you select Prompt answer required without providing default answers, the report cannot execute on a schedule.

7 Click Next.

Page 341: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Object Prompts 341

8 On the Select default prompt answer(s) page, click Add to define default answers for the prompt.

Defining default answers for prompts is optional. To skip this step, click Finish.

9 In the Select Objects window, select default answers to the prompt, and click OK.

10 On the Select default prompt answer(s) page, click Finish.

11 In the Save As window, navigate to the location in which you want to save the prompt.

12 Type a name, and click Save.

Using Object Prompts in a Report

Object prompts have multiple uses, but one of the most common uses is to place object prompts for metrics, attributes, consolidations, or custom groups on a template. You might also use an object prompt for a report filter or for the condition component of a metric.

To build an object with an object prompt:

1 Create the object in which you want to use the object prompt. It may be a report, a template, a metric, or another MicroStrategy object.

2 In the object editor, with the Object Browser, locate the object prompt and drag and drop it into the appropriate section of the object editor. For example, if your object prompt presents a list of metrics, drag and drop it into the columns or rows of the template definition window in the Report Editor. If your object prompt presents a list of report filters objects, drag and drop it into the report filter definition window in the Report Editor.

3 Save the object.

Page 342: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

342 Object Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

When you run the report, a prompt resolution window opens listing the objects from which you can choose to answer the object prompt. If the object prompt is required, you must answer (resolve) the prompt before the report will run.

To resolve an object prompt:

1 Run a report containing an object prompt.

2 Select objects from the list in the left window and click > to add them to the right window.

3 Click Finish to run the report with your prompt answers.

Using Object Prompts for Report Building

Assume you need to create a completely dynamic report that asks users at run time to choose what data to filter on and what attributes and metrics to display on the report. Object prompts enable this type of dynamic report creation. As the report designer, you can build a report that acts as a report building wizard that incorporates object prompts to define the report filter and template contents on the fly.

To create a wizard-like report that uses object prompts:

1 Create an object prompt that uses a predefined list of filters. Choose a wide variety of filters based on many different aspects of the MicroStrategy project. Give a title and description to the object prompt. Save and close it.

Each object prompt can contain only one object type. Therefore, you must create a separate object prompt for each object type.

2 Create another object prompt that uses a predefined list of attributes. Offer a variety of attributes from every hierarchy. Give this object prompt a title and description. Save and close it.

Page 343: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Object Prompts 343

3 Create a third object prompt that uses a search object to find every metric object. This assumes that you want to prompt on every metric available in the project. Otherwise, you could use a predefined list of metrics. Give this object prompt a title and description. Save and close it.

4 Create a new report. Add the first object prompt to the filter definition pane in the Report Editor. Add the second and third object prompts to the template.

5 Run the report and notice how the combination of prompts act like a report building wizard.

Page 344: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

344 Value Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Value Prompts

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Create and use value prompts.

Value prompts are typically used as part of a filter definition, but they may also be used as part of a metric formula. You can prompt on a date, a numeric value, a text string, a big decimal value, or a long value.

The long value prompt is not enabled by default. To enable the long value prompt, in MicroStrategy Desktop, from the Tools menu, select My Preferences. In the My Preferences window, under Categories, select Prompts. Select the Add long prompts to the list of available value prompts check box.

The following is an example of a text value prompt that prompts users to type in a manufacturer’s name:

Text Value Prompt

Page 345: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Value Prompts 345

Creating a Value Prompt

To create a value prompt:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the File menu, point to New, and select Prompt.

2 In the Prompt Generation Wizard open, click Value prompt.

3 Click Next.

4 On the Choose a value prompt type page, select the type of value prompt you want to create. The options are: date and time, numeric prompt, text prompt, big decimal, or long prompt.

The Long prompt is only displayed if it is enabled in the My Preferences window.

5 Click Next.

6 On the Provide general information for the prompt page, in the Display properties session, define the following settings:

• In the Title box, type a title for the prompt.

• In the Instructions box, type instructions so the users understand which choices they have to make when answering the prompt.

• Click Modify to change the display style of the prompt in MicroStrategy Web.

• In the Personal answers allowed drop-down list, select from None, Single, or Multiple.

For more information about saving and reusing prompt answers, see “Save and Reuse Prompt Answers” starting on page 353.

Page 346: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

346 Value Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

7 In the Prompt Restrictions section, define the following settings:

• Select the Minimum value check box if you want to set the lowest value allowed for the prompt answer, then set that number.

• Select the Maximum value check box if you want to set the highest value allowed for the prompt answer, then set that number.

• Select the Prompt answer required check box if you want to require users to answer the prompt before running the report.

If you select Prompt answer required without providing default answers, the report cannot execute on a schedule.

8 On the Select default prompt answer(s) page, select the Default value check box, and type the value in the text box.

If you are creating a date prompt:

• If you click on the drop-down list, a calendar displays, from which you can select a specific date.

• To set a dynamic date, that is, a date or time range that meets specific offset conditions, click Date Editor.

Date Editor

9 On the Select default prompt answer(s) page, click Finish.

10 In the Save As window, select the folder in which to save the new prompt.

11 Type a name, and click Save.

Page 347: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Value Prompts 347

Using Value Prompts in a Report

Where you use a value prompt depends on the type of value prompt you create:

• Date prompts can be used in any place where you would normally specify a date, such as in a filter that qualifies on an attribute of a date data type.

• Numeric prompts can be used in any place where you would normally specify a number, such as in a metric qualification.

• Text prompts can be used in any place where you would normally specify a text string, such as in an attribute form qualification.

• Big decimal prompts can be used in any place where you need to qualify on a high precision value (up to 38 digits), such as an attribute qualification on the ID attribute form.

To use a value prompt:

1 Create the object in which you want to use the value prompt. (It may be a report filter or a metric.)

2 In the object editor, with the Object Browser, locate the value prompt, and drag and drop it into the appropriate section of the object editor. For example, if you are using a date prompt in a date qualification filter, drag and drop the date prompt beside the Value box in the Attribute Qualification window.

3 Save the object.

When you run the report, a prompt resolution window opens. If the value prompt is required, you must answer (resolve) the prompt before the report will run.

Page 348: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

348 Value Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To resolve a value prompt:

1 Run a report containing a value prompt.

2 Enter an appropriate value.

3 Click Finish to run the report with your prompt answer.

Page 349: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Creating Local Prompts in the Report Editor 349

Creating Local Prompts in the Report Editor

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Create prompts on the fly within the Report Editor.

You can also create prompts on the fly within the Report Editor.

To create prompts on the fly within the Report Editor:

1 Open a report in Design View.

2 In the Object Browser, right-click an attribute or metric, and select Report Filter Prompt, as shown below:

Report Filter Prompt Menu

This prompt will become part of the report definition and cannot be re-used in other reports.

3 In the Prompt Generation Editor, select one of the three prompt generation options:

• List all <attribute>—Creates a prompt that lists all the elements of the selected attribute. At run time, the user selects which elements to include.

Page 350: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

350 Creating Local Prompts in the Report Editor © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• Qualify on the Attribute <attribute>—Creates a prompt that qualifies on the selected attribute. At run time, the user completes the qualification. Attribute elements that meet the qualification are displayed on the report.

• List <attribute> filtered by—Creates a prompt that lists all the elements that meet the filter qualification. At run time, the user selects which of those elements to include.

You can either type in the name of the filter or click the browse button.

The Prompt Generation Editor is shown below:

Prompt Generation Editor

4 Click OK.

Page 351: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Re-prompting Inside Reports 351

Re-prompting Inside Reports

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Use the Re-prompt report button to modify prompt answers in a prompted report.

Simply refreshing a report will not re-prompt it. To re-prompt an open report, click the Re-prompt button found on the toolbar, as shown below:

Re-prompt

When you click the Re-prompt report button, the prompt selection window opens. You can then make a new selection of prompt answers, which will be applied when the report re-executes.

Page 352: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

352 Saving Reports with Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Saving Reports with Prompts

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Choose the appropriate settings when saving a report containing prompt objects in its definition.

When you save a prompted report after answering prompts and running the report, you are presented with additional save options, as shown below:

Save Options

The Save Options window has the following options:

• Static—You will no longer be prompted when you run the report in the future. The prompt answers you selected are saved to the report definition and used every time you run the report in the future.

• Prompted—You will continue to be prompted every time you run the report in the future. You can choose whether to be prompted for just the filter definition prompts, just the template prompts, or both.

Page 353: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Saving Reports with Prompts 353

• Set the current prompt answers to be the default prompt answers—The prompt answers you select become the new default prompt answers when you run the report in the future. This check box is only enabled if Prompted is selected.

• Remember options next time—Your selections in the Save Options window will become the default selections when you save prompted reports in the future.

Save and Reuse Prompt Answers

When you run a prompted report or document, you are required to answer the prompt every time you execute the report or the document. You can save the prompt answers and reuse them when you run the same report again. This feature is particularly useful when you have to select a long list of elements for an attribute element prompt or create a complex expression for an expression prompt.

The image below shows the Prompt Generation Wizard option for saving your personal answers when defining the prompt:

Prompt Generation Wizard

Page 354: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

354 Saving Reports with Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Personal answers must be enabled for prompts in the Project Configuration Editor before you can allow personal answers.

Personal answers are saved for each prompt and each user, but they can be used on different reports. When you create a prompt, you can enable none, single, or multiple personal answers:

• None: No personal answers can be saved. Every time a user sees the prompt, he must answer it (if it is required) or ignore it.

• Single: Only one personal answer can be saved. When the prompt is used again (on this report or a different one), the personal answer is displayed. A user can keep the personal answer, or add or delete selections. The user can save changes, but only one personal answer can be saved for the prompt.

For example, you run a report with the Year attribute and Revenue metric on the template and an attribute element prompt on the Year attribute. The user has selected the Remember this answer check box and answered the prompt with year 2008 and 2009. When he runs the report again, 2008 and 2009 prompt answers will be displayed as the default prompt answers, as shown below:

Single Element Prompt Display

Page 355: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Saving Reports with Prompts 355

• Multiple: Multiple user answers can be saved enabling different answers for the same prompt. When the prompt is used again (on this report or a different one), the personal answers are available, and the user can select one of them or answer the prompt manually. The image below shows multiple saved answers:

Multiple Element Prompt Window

Personal answers are saved in the My Personal Objects\My Answers\Prompt Answers folder.

If the report designer places shortcuts to the same prompt in multiple reports, users can access their saved answers in all of those reports.

To save single prompt answers at report run time:

1 Run a prompted report.

This procedure assumes the report includes a prompt that was created with the Personal answers allowed: Single option.

2 Select your prompt answers.

Page 356: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

356 Saving Reports with Prompts © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

3 Select the Remember this answer check box.

4 Click Finish.

To save multiple prompt answers at report run time:

1 Run a prompted report.

This procedure assumes the report includes a prompt that was created with the Personal answers allowed: Multiple option.

2 Select your prompt answers.

3 Select the Save this answer check box.

4 In the text box on the top of the page, type a name for the saved prompt answers, as shown below:

Element Prompt Window

5 Click Set as Default, if desired.

6 Click Finish to run the report.

Page 357: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Saving Reports with Prompts 357

To reuse your prompt answers at report run time:

1 Run a prompted report.

2 Below the prompt description, click the drop-down list.

3 Select the desired prompt answer, as shown in the image below:

Yearly Revenue Prompt

You can edit your previous prompt answers by clicking Edit Answers.

4 Click Finish.

Page 358: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

358 What Is a Search Object? © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

What Is a Search Object?

After completing this topic, you will be able to:

Use various search criteria to search for objects in a MicroStrategy project. Use the results of a search object in a prompt object.

Searches enable you to search for a specific object or a collection of objects that meet certain criteria. You can restrict the search results by name, ID, and location, the date range during which objects were created or last modified, object type, and object owner. The more criteria you specify, the smaller the number of objects that will meet those criteria and be returned.

The Search for Objects Editor

You perform searches using the Search for Objects Editor.

To access the Search for Objects Editor:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the Tools menu, select Search for Objects, as shown below:

Search for Objects

Page 359: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. What Is a Search Object? 359

By default, you can use the Search for Objects window to restrict search results by one or more of the following criteria:

• Object name and location

• Date range of object creation or modification

• Object type

• Object owner

• Object ID

Search By Components

You can search for objects containing particular objects or objects contained by particular objects by enabling two additional tabs using the Search Options window.

To activate the Contains and Contained By tabs:

1 In the Search for Objects Editor, on the Tools menu, select Options.

2 In the Search Options window, select the Show ‘Contains’ and ‘Contained By’ tabs check box

3 Click OK to close the Search options window.

You can search for objects that are contained by particular objects, rather than creating an independent search.

To view components of an object using the search by components shortcut:

1 Select the object in which you want to view components.

2 Right-click and select Search for Components.

Page 360: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

360 What Is a Search Object? © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Search Based on Object ID

Users can now search for objects based on an object ID in the Search for Objects window, as shown below:

Search by ID Window

To enable the search option:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the Tools menu, select Search for Objects.

2 In the Search for Objects window, on the Tools menu, select Search by ID, as shown below:

Search by ID Option

3 Enter your search criteria.

4 Click Find Now.

Page 361: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. What Is a Search Object? 361

Saving Searches

You can save searches just like any other MicroStrategy object to use them again later or incorporate them into prompt objects.

Many of the prompts described in the previous topic can use the results of a search to generate a list of potential prompt answers.

To save a search:

1 With the Search for Object Editor, create a search.

2 On the File menu, select Save.

3 In the Save As window, navigate to the location in which you want to save the search, enter a name for the search, and click Save.

Search-based Prompts

You may recall from the previous topic that the Prompt Generation Wizard has the option to reference a search object in defining certain types of prompts. Using searches in prompts enables you to limit a possibly overwhelming set of potential prompt answers. It also allows you to make the set of potential prompt answers more dynamic, since the set of potential prompt answers is the list of objects returned by the search object, rather than a static list.

For example, suppose you want to create a report whose template includes an object prompt that allows users to select from a list of metrics whose name contains the word “Revenue.” You first create a search that returns a list of metrics whose name contains the word “Revenue.” You then incorporate the search object into an object prompt, which you then place on the report template. Every time the report is run, the search object is executed to return the latest list of metrics with the word “Revenue,” which is then presented to the user in the prompt answer window. The user is always selecting from the latest list of revenue metrics.

Page 362: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

362 Exercises: Prompts and Searches © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Exercises: Prompts and Searches

Create Filter Definition Prompts

Overview

Create the following three prompts and use them in the report filter of a report that has Item and Revenue on its template.

– Prompt on Product hierarchy

– Prompt on the Quarter attribute element list—Users see the entire list of elements, and 2007 Q4 should be the default answer. Answering the prompt is required.

– Metric qualification prompt —Users should be prompted to qualify on the Revenue metric.

Choose the following answers to the prompts:

• Books

• 2009 Q3 and 2009 Q4

• Revenue greater than 20,000

The report results should look like the following:

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Page 363: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Prompts and Searches 363

Detailed Instructions

Create the My Prompts Exercises folder:

1 In the MicroStrategy Tutorial project, in the Folder List, select the My Objects folder.

2 On the File menu, point to New, and select Folder.

3 Name the folder My Prompts Exercises.

To create a prompt on the Product hierarchy

4 In the Object Viewer, double-click the My Prompts Exercises folder to begin working in it.

5 On the File menu, point to New, and select Prompt.

6 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, keep the Filter Definition Prompt option selected.

7 Select Choose from all attributes in a hierarchy, and click Next.

8 On the Reduce the number of hierarchies available at runtime page, click Choose a hierarchy object.

9 Use the browse button to select the Products hierarchy.

10 Click OK.

11 On the Reduce the number of hierarchies available at runtime page, click Next.

12 In the Prompt Resolution Wizard, click Finish.

13 In the Save As window, navigate to the My Prompts Exercises folder.

14 Save the prompt as Choose from all attributes in the Products hierarchy.

To create a prompt on the Quarter attribute elements:

15 In Desktop, on the File menu, point to New, and select Prompt.

Page 364: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

364 Exercises: Prompts and Searches © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

16 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, keep the Filter Definition Prompt option selected.

17 Select Choose from an attribute element list, and click Next.

18 On the Select the attribute to be used in the prompt page, use the browse button to select the Quarter attribute from the Time folder,.

19 Click OK.

20 On the Select the attribute to be used in the prompt page, click Next.

21 On the Reduce the number of elements available to the user at runtime page, keep the List all elements (no restriction) option selected.

22 Click Next.

23 On the Provide general information for the prompt page, click Next.

24 On the Select default prompt answer(s) page, click Add.

25 In the Select Objects window, in the Available objects list, select 2009 Q4.

26 Use the > button to add it to the Selected objects window.

27 Click OK to close the Select Objects window.

28 On the Select default prompt answer(s) page, click Finish.

29 In the Save As window, navigate to your My Prompts Exercises folder.

30 Save the prompt as Choose from all elements of Quarter.

To create a prompt on the Revenue metric:

31 On the File menu, point to New, and select Prompt.

Page 365: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Prompts and Searches 365

32 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, keep the Filter Definition Prompt option selected.

33 Select Qualify on a metric, and click Next.

34 On the Select a metric or metric object to be used in the prompt page, keep the Choose a metric object option selected.

35 Use the browse button to select the Revenue metric (from the Sales Metrics folder).

36 Click Next.

37 On the Provide general information for the prompt page, click Finish.

38 In the Save As window, navigate to your My Prompts Exercises folder, and save the prompt as Qualify on metric object Revenue.

To create a report using these three prompts:

39 In Desktop, on the File menu, point to New, and select Report.

40 In the New Grid window, keep Blank Report selected, and click OK.

41 In the Report Editor, in My Shortcuts, click My Personal Objects.

42 In the Object Browser, double-click the My Objects folder.

43 Double-click the My Prompts Exercises folder.

44 Drag and drop the following three prompts into the Report Filter definition window.

• Choose from all attributes in the Products hierarchy

• Choose from all elements of Quarter

• Qualify on metric object Revenue

Page 366: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

366 Exercises: Prompts and Searches © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

45 In the Object Browser, in My Shortcuts, click Attributes.

46 In the Object Browser, double-click the Products folder.

47 Drag and drop the Item attribute into the rows of the template definition window.

48 In the Object Browser, in My Shortcuts, click Metrics.

49 In the Object Browser, double-click the Sales Metrics folder.

50 Drag and drop the Revenue metric into the columns of the template definition window.

51 In the Report Editor, click Run.

52 Answer the prompts accordingly:

• For the first prompt, in the left window, double-click the Category attribute to expand it. Drag and drop Books into the right window, and click Next.

• For the second prompt, notice that the default answer, 2009 Q4, is already selected. In the left window, select 2009 Q3 and click the > button to add it to the right window. Click Next.

• For the third and final prompt, in the Set Qualification window, in the Parameters section, change the Operator to Greater than and in the Value box, type 20000.

• Click Finish.

53 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

54 In the report, click Save and Close.

55 In the Save Report As window, navigate to your My Reports Exercises folder.

Page 367: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Prompts and Searches 367

56 Save the report as Filter Definition Prompts.

57 In the Save Options window, select Prompted.

58 Click Only filter will be prompted.

59 Click OK.

Create Object Prompts

Overview

Create a report that prompts you to select both the metrics and attributes that appear on the template.

• The metric prompt should enable you to select from a list of metrics in the Sales Metrics folder.

• The attribute prompt should enable you to select any attribute returned by the “Search for all objects of type Attribute” search. (This search object is already built for you and can be found in the Public Object\Searches folder.)

• This original report should use an empty report filter (no filter criteria) and be named Prompts-Original.

When you run the report, select Units Sold, Category, and Year, so the report results look like the following:

Page 368: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

368 Exercises: Prompts and Searches © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

You will then save the report as prompted with the name Prompts-Template Prompted. Run the report again, and save the report by selecting the static save option. You will name the static version of the report Prompts-Static.

Finally, answer the following questions:

• What are the differences between Prompts-Original, Prompts-Template Prompted, and Prompts-Static?

_______________________________________

_______________________________________

_______________________________________

• Which reports prompt you?

_______________________________________

_______________________________________

• Which ones have default answers selected?

_______________________________________

• What does this tell you about the different save options?

_______________________________________

_______________________________________

_______________________________________

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

Create a prompt for sales metrics:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the File menu, point to New, and select Prompt.

2 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, click Object prompt, and click Next.

Page 369: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Prompts and Searches 369

3 On the Reduce the number of objects available to the user at runtime page, keep the Use a pre-defined list of objects option selected, and click Add.

4 In the Select Objects window, in the Available objects window, double-click the Public Objects folder.

5 Double-click the Metrics folder.

6 Double-click the Sales Metrics folder.

7 Select Average Revenue and, while holding down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, select Units Sold.

8 Click > to move the list of metrics to the Selected objects window.

9 Click OK to close the Select Objects window.

10 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, click Finish.

11 In the Save As window, navigate to your My Prompts Exercises folder, and save the prompt as Choose from a list of Metrics.

Page 370: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

370 Exercises: Prompts and Searches © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Create a prompt for attributes:

12 On the File menu, point to New, and select Prompt.

13 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, click Object prompt.

14 Click Next.

15 On the Reduce the number of objects available to the user at runtime page, click Use the results of a search object.

16 Click browse to select the Search for all objects of type Attribute search object.

17 Click OK.

18 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, click Finish.

19 In the Save As window, navigate to your My Prompts Exercises folder and save the prompt as Choose from a list of Attributes.

Create a report using the object prompts:

20 On the File menu, point to New, and select Report.

21 In the New Grid window, keep Blank Report selected, and click OK.

22 In the Report Editor, in My Shortcuts, click My Personal Objects.

23 In the Object Browser, double-click the My Objects folder.

24 Double-click the My Prompts Exercises folder.

25 Drag and drop the Choose from a list of Metrics prompt into the columns of the template definition window.

26 Drag and drop the Choose from a list of Attributes prompt into the rows of the template definition window.

Page 371: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Prompts and Searches 371

The sequence in which you add prompts to a report determines the order in which the prompts are presented to the user when the report runs. However, you can change this order by selecting Prompt Ordering from the Data menu. In the Prompt Ordering window, use the arrow keys to re-order the prompt objects in the report.

The Prompt Ordering option under the Data menu is only available when a report has more than one prompt object.

27 In the report, click Save and Close.

28 In the Save Report As window, navigate to your My Reports Exercises folder.

29 Save the report as Prompts-Original.

Run the original report:

30 In the Folder List, select the My Reports Exercises folder.

31 In the Object Viewer, double-click the Prompts-Original report to run it.

32 For the first prompt, in the left window, select Units Sold.

33 Click > to move it to the right window.

34 Click Next.

35 For the second prompt, in the left window, select Category and, while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard, select Year.

36 Click > to move both attributes to the right window.

37 In the right window, select Category, and click the down arrow button to the right of the right window.

This will result in the Category attribute appearing to the right of the Year attribute on the report template.

38 In the prompt selection window, click Finish.

Page 372: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

372 Exercises: Prompts and Searches © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

39 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

Save the report with a prompted template and run it again:

40 In the report, on the File menu, select Save As.

41 In the Save Report As window, navigate to your My Reports Exercises folder.

42 Save the report as Prompts - Template Prompted.

43 In the Save Options window, select Prompted.

44 Click Only template will be prompted.

45 Leave the Set the current prompt answers to be the default prompt answers check box selected.

If selected, prompt answers you selected during report run time become the new default prompt answers. When the report runs again, these answers display as default.

46 Click OK to return to the report.

47 In the report, click Re-prompt report to return to the prompt selection window.

For the first prompt, notice that the answer you selected the last time, Units Sold, now appears as the default answer.

48 Click Next.

For the second prompt, again notice that the answers you selected the last time, Year and Category, now appear as the default answers.

49 Click Finish.

Page 373: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Prompts and Searches 373

Save and run the report with the static save option:

50 In the report, on the File menu, select Save As.

51 In the Save Report As window, navigate to your My Reports Exercises folder, and save the report as Prompts - Static.

52 In the Save Options window, click Static.

53 Clear the Remember options next time check box.

54 Click OK to return to the report.

55 Close the report.

56 In the Folder list, select the My Reports Exercises folder.

57 In the Object Viewer, double-click the Prompts-Static report to run it.

Notice that you are no longer prompted since you saved the report as a static report, and the report ran with your previously saved prompt answers.

58 Close the report.

59 Return to the beginning of the exercise and answer the questions.

Page 374: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

374 Exercises: Prompts and Searches © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Create a Value Prompt

Overview

Suppose you want to see a report that lists all employees hired before a certain date, and you select the date when you run the report. If you enter December 31, 2000, as the hire date, the final report should look like the following:

Creating this prompted report is a little different than the previous reports because the prompt is not created as an independent object. Instead, you will create the prompt from within the Report Filter definition window.

When you create the report filter, you will see the following screen:

Page 375: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Prompts and Searches 375

Note that there is a difference between the value prompt (created by clicking Simple Prompt):

and the filter prompt (created by clicking Prompt):

Using the Simple Prompt button, you can create a value prompt that allows the user to only enter a date value for the hire date. Using the Prompt button, you can create an attribute filter definition prompt that enables the user to select the operator and enter a date value for the hire date.

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the File menu, point to New, and select Report.

2 In the New Grid window, keep Blank Report selected, and click OK.

3 In the Report Editor, in the Object Browser, double-click the Geography hierarchy to expand it.

4 Drag and drop the Employee and the Hire Date attributes into the rows of the template definition window.

5 In the Object Browser, drag and drop the Hire Date attribute into the Report Filter definition window.

6 In the Attribute Qualification window, from the Qualify On list, select ID.

7 In the Operator drop-down list, select Less than.

Page 376: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

376 Exercises: Prompts and Searches © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

8 Click Simple Prompt:

9 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, on the Provide general information for the prompt page, click Next.

10 On the Select default prompt answer(s) page, clear the Default value check box, and click Finish.

11 Click OK to close the Attribute Qualification window.

12 In the report, click Run.

13 In the prompt selection window, click calendar.

14 In the Date and Time Editor, keep the Static date option selected, and type in 4/1/2000 for the date value.

You could have also used the drop-down calendar to select a date.

15 Click OK to close the Date Editor.

16 In the prompt selection window, click Finish.

17 Refer to the beginning of this exercise to verify your results.

18 Click Save and Close.

19 In the Save Report As window, navigate to your My Reports Exercises folder and save the report as Value Prompt.

20 In the Save Options window, select Prompted.

Page 377: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Prompts and Searches 377

21 Click Only filter will be prompted.

22 Click OK.

Search for Report Elements

Overview

You can use a search to narrow down the potential prompt answers displayed in the prompt selection window. Create a report that enables you to select the attributes to display on the report template. You should be able to choose from a list of attributes containing the word “Customer.” The report template should also show Units Sold, but it should not include any report filtering conditions. If you select both Customer Region and Customer State as your prompt answers, the first few rows of the report results should look like the following:

Page 378: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

378 Exercises: Prompts and Searches © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

You can use the detailed instructions that follow if you want help.

Detailed Instructions

Create a search for attributes containing “Customer”:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, on the toolbar, click Search.

2 In the Search for Objects editor, on the Name and Location tab, in the Named box, type Customer.

3 In the Look in box, click Browse to select the Schema Objects folder.

4 Click the Object Types tab.

5 Click Only these types of objects.

6 Select the Attribute check box.

7 In the Search for Objects Editor, click Find Now. The search results should look like the following:

Save this search as a search object:

8 In the Search for Objects Editor, on the File menu, select Save.

Page 379: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Exercises: Prompts and Searches 379

9 In the Save As window, navigate to your My Prompts Exercises folder, and save the search as Customer Attributes.

10 Close the Search for Objects Editor.

Create an object prompt using the results of your search object:

11 On the File menu, point to New, and select Prompt.

12 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, click Object Prompt, and click Next.

13 On the Select the number of objects available to the user at runtime page, click Use the results of a search object.

14 Click Browse.

15 In the Open window, navigate to My Personal Objects\ My Objects\ My Prompts Exercises folder, and select the Customer Attributes search object.

16 Click OK.

17 In the Prompt Generation Wizard, click Finish.

18 In the Save As window, navigate to the My Prompts Exercises folder, and save the prompt as Choose from a list of Customer Attributes.

Create a report using the object prompt:

19 On the File menu, point to New, and select Report.

20 In the New Grid window, keep Blank Report selected and click OK.

21 In the Report Editor, in My Shortcuts, click My Personal Objects.

22 In the Object Browser, double-click the My Objects folder.

23 Double-click the My Prompts Exercises folder.

Page 380: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

380 Exercises: Prompts and Searches © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

24 Drag and drop the Choose from a list of Customer Attributes object prompt into the rows of the template definition window.

25 In the Object Browser, in My Shortcuts, click Public Objects.

26 In the Object Browser, double-click the Metrics folder.

27 Double-click the Sales Metrics folder.

28 Drag and drop the Units Sold metric into the columns of the template definition window.

29 In the report, click Run.

In the prompt answer window, in the left window, notice the results of your Customer Attributes search.

30 Select Customer Region and, while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard, select Customer State.

31 Click > to add both attributes to the right window.

32 In the prompt answer window, click Finish.

33 Refer to the beginning of the exercise to verify your results.

34 Click Save and Close.

35 In the Save Report As window, navigate to your My Reports Exercises folder.

36 Save the report as Search for Customer Attribute Elements Report.

37 In the Save Options window, select Prompted.

38 Click Only template will be prompted.

39 Click OK.

Page 381: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Prompts and Searches 8

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. Lesson Summary 381

Lesson Summary

In this lesson you learned:

• Prompts are used to dynamically modify the contents of a report. With prompts, you can determine, at run time, the objects you want to retrieve for the report and the report filtering conditions.

• You can make different prompt selections each time you run the report.

• You create the following types of prompts with the Prompt Generation Wizard—filter definition prompt, object prompt, value prompt, and level prompt.

• Filter definition prompts are used within report filters to specify conditions that data must meet to be included in report results.

• Object prompts enable you to create very versatile reports. With an object prompt you can qualify on a specified list of MicroStrategy objects or any MicroStrategy object that is returned by a search object.

• Value prompts are typically used as part of a filter definition, but they may also be used as part of a metric formula. You can prompt on a date, a numeric value, a text string, a big decimal value, or a long value.

• You can also create prompts on the fly within the Report Editor.

• When you save a prompted report after answering prompts and running the report, you are presented with additional save options. You can save the report as a prompted or static report.

• You can save the prompt answers and reuse them when you run the same report again.

• Searches enable you to search for a specific object or a collection of objects that meet certain criteria.

Page 382: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Prompts and Searches MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials8

382 Lesson Summary © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

• You can restrict the search results by name, ID, and location, the date range during which objects were created or last modified, object type, and object owner.

• Using searches in prompts enables you to limit a possibly overwhelming set of potential prompt answers. It also allows you to make the set of potential prompt answers more dynamic.

Page 383: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 383

AMICROSTRATEGY TUTORIAL

Appendix Description

This appendix provides information on the MicroStrategy Tutorial project, including the data model and physical warehouse schema.

Page 384: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy TutorialA

384 The MicroStrategy Tutorial Data Model © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

The MicroStrategy Tutorial Data Model

A data model is a logical map that represents the inherent properties of enterprise data, disregarding software, hardware, or machine performance considerations. Data models show:

• Data elements grouped into records

• Relationships and association surrounding those records

For more detailed information about data modeling, refer to the Project Design Guide.

Although the MicroStrategy Tutorial data model is included in this section for your reference, you can also view it directly in the product.

To view the MicroStrategy Tutorial data model:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, log in to the project source that contains the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and expand the MicroStrategy Tutorial project.

2 On the Schema menu, point to Graphical View and select Hierarchies.

3 In the Hierarchy Viewer, to view a different hierarchy, in the Hierarchy drop-down box, select the hierarchy you want to view.

4 To focus on a different entry point, in the Entry Point drop-down box, select the entry point you want to view.

5 To view the entire hierarchy in the window, on the View menu, select Fit in window.

You can rearrange the attributes by dragging and dropping them. Rearranging attributes does not affect the browse order, but it enables you to view the hierarchy in a way that is meaningful to you.

Page 385: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Tutorial A

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. The MicroStrategy Tutorial Data Model 385

6 To return to the default view, on the View menu, select Auto arrange.

7 To save the layout view of the hierarchy, on the File menu, select Save layout. The next time you open the Hierarchy Viewer, it displays the saved view.

The MicroStrategy Tutorial data model consists of the following hierarchies:

• Geography

• Customers

• Time

• Products

Page 386: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy TutorialA

386 The MicroStrategy Tutorial Data Model © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Geography Hierarchy

Page 387: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Tutorial A

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. The MicroStrategy Tutorial Data Model 387

Customers Hierarchy

Page 388: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy TutorialA

388 The MicroStrategy Tutorial Data Model © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Time Hierarchy

Page 389: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Tutorial A

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. The MicroStrategy Tutorial Schema 389

Products Hierarchy

The MicroStrategy Tutorial Schema

A schema is a logical and physical definition of warehouse data elements, physical characteristics, and interrelationships. This appendix shows the physical schema with the data types displayed. You can also choose to view the logical schema on your own. For instructions, refer to the procedure below.

For more detailed information on the schema, refer to the Project Design Guide.

Although the MicroStrategy Tutorial physical schema is listed below for your reference, you can also view the physical or logical schema directly in the product.

Page 390: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy TutorialA

390 The MicroStrategy Tutorial Schema © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

To view the MicroStrategy Tutorial schema:

1 In MicroStrategy Desktop, log in to the project source that contains the MicroStrategy Tutorial project and expand the MicroStrategy Tutorial project.

2 On the Schema menu, point to Graphical View and select Tables.

3 In the Table Viewer, to change display preferences for the logical view, on the Options menu, select any of the following options:

– Show joins—Enables you to select whether to connect the tables to represent the joins between the table columns

– Use circular joins—Enables you to select whether to use circular joins

– Show relationships—Enables you to select whether to map the relationships between the tables

– Show relationship types—Enables you to select whether to differentiate between one-to-one, one-to-many, many-to-one, and many-to-many relationships

– Show columns—Enables you to select whether to display the warehouse columns that define each attribute as a link between the logical and physical views

4 To switch to the physical view, on the View menu, select Physical view.

Page 391: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Tutorial A

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. The MicroStrategy Tutorial Schema 391

5 To change display preferences for the physical view, on the Options menu, select any of the following options:

– Show joins—Enables you to select whether to connect the tables to represent the joins between the warehouse tables

– Use circular joins—Enables you to select whether to use circular joins

– Show column data types—Enables you to select whether to show the data type and size for each column

– Show table prefixes—Enables you to select whether to display the table prefix as part of the table name

6 To switch back to the logical view, on the View menu, select Logical view.

7 To view the entire schema in the window, on the View menu, select Fit in window.

You can rearrange the tables by dragging and dropping them. Rearranging the tables does not affect the relationships or joins, but it enables you to view the tables in a way that is meaningful to you.

8 To return to the default view, on the View menu, select Auto arrange.

9 To save the layout view of the tables, on the File menu, select Save layout. The next time you open the Table Viewer, it displays the saved view.

10 To copy the layout view, on the File menu, select Copy as Metafile (.wmf).

Page 392: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy TutorialA

392 The MicroStrategy Tutorial Schema © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

The MicroStrategy Tutorial schema is divided into the following parts:

• Geography

• Customers

• Time

• Products

• Fact tables

• Partition mapping table

Page 393: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Tutorial A

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. The MicroStrategy Tutorial Schema 393

Geography Schema

Page 394: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy TutorialA

394 The MicroStrategy Tutorial Schema © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Customers Schema

Page 395: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Tutorial A

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. The MicroStrategy Tutorial Schema 395

Time Schema

Page 396: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy TutorialA

396 The MicroStrategy Tutorial Schema © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Products Schema

Page 397: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Tutorial A

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. The MicroStrategy Tutorial Schema 397

Fact Tables Schema

Page 398: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy TutorialA

398 The MicroStrategy Tutorial Schema © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Page 399: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 399

MICROSTRATEGY GLOSSARY

This Glossary presents some of the more commonly used terms for both MicroStrategy and Data Warehousing in general.

A

Access control A facility of the MicroStrategy security subsystem that defines and enforces the rights of users in accessing and modifying MicroStrategy objects such as reports and filters.

Access control list A list of users and groups and the access permissions that each has for an object.

Active user A user who logs into a MicroStrategy system. When a user logs in to the system, a user session is established and remains open until the user logs out of the system or the system logs the user out. Users that are logged in but are not doing anything still consume some resources on Intelligence Server.

Page 400: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

400 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

ActiveX Data Objects A set of interfaces designed for accessing a wide variety of data sources through OLE DB system interfaces. ADO MD (multidimensional) provides a set of interfaces that are optimized for multidimensional data applications.

Ad hoc query A SQL query dynamically constructed by desktop tools and indeterminate prior to issuance. The user is asking a new question that has not been answered by an existing report.

Address book A list of addresses for all users and groups.

Administrator The user category of one who installs and monitors software and user configurations, maintains the state of the software, and administers the different MicroStrategy servers in the platform. An administrator also defines users, assigns user login accounts and user privileges, and analyzes the performance of the system.

Aggregatable The characteristic of facts that can be summed or otherwise aggregated.

Aggregate function A numeric function that acts on a column of data and produces a single result. Examples include SUM, COUNT, MAX, MIN, and AVG.

Aggregate table A fact table that stores data that has been aggregated along one or more dimensions.

Aggregation The combining of numeric data at a specific attribute level. The most common function is sum, which creates an additive total.

Analyst The user category of one who accesses reports, performs drilling, does exception reporting, generates report requirements, and is aware of the necessary analysis. An analyst receives useful data from information devices like alphanumeric pagers, fax machines, and e-mail without fully understanding how such information is derived or delivered.

Page 401: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 401

Analytical Engine A component of the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server that performs all advanced analytical functions. The Analytical Engine evaluates functions not supported by the data warehouse RDBMS and it cross-tabulates reports.

Application object MicroStrategy object used to provide analysis of and insight into relevant data. Application objects are developed in MicroStrategy Desktop and they are the building blocks for reports and HTML documents. Application objects include these object types: report, HTML document, template, filter, metric, custom group, consolidation, prompt.

Applicationprogramming interface

(API)

A set of related functions that provides an interface between one or more existing applications and new applications. The API may be seen as a platform over a set of services on which new applications can be built. The functions, or interfaces, are implemented in a dynamic link library, and are defined in a standardized syntax. Application functionality available in the platform can be integrated or embedded into other applications through use of the APIs.

Application-levelpartition

In application-level partitioning, the application rather than the database server manages the partition tables. MicroStrategy supports two methods of application-level partitioning: metadata partition mapping and warehouse partition mapping. Compare database-level partition.

Apply function A function that allows you to insert custom SQL into an expression.

Atomic The lowest level of granularity. Cannot be decomposed into smaller parts.

Attribute A data level defined by the system architect and associated with one or more columns in a data warehouse lookup table. Attributes include data classifications like Region, Order, Customer, Age, Item, City, and Year. They provide a means for aggregating and filtering at a given level.

Page 402: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

402 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Attribute drill path In MicroStrategy, a path that determines which attributes are presented to an interface; typically a project defines drill paths from parent attributes to their children.

Attribute element A value of any of the attribute forms of an attribute. For example, New York and Dallas are elements of the attribute City; January, February, and March are elements of the attribute Month.

Attribute form One of several columns associated with an attribute that are different aspects of the same thing. For example, ID, Name, Last Name, Long Description, and Abbreviation could be forms of the attribute Customer. Every attribute supports its own collection of forms.

Attribute qualifier A filter that qualifies on an attribute.

Attribute role A database column that is used to define more than one attribute. For example, Billing City and Shipping City are two attributes that have the same table and columns defined as a lookup table.

Authentication The system process of validating user login information. A login ID and password are compared against an authorized list, and if a match is detected, specific access rights and application privileges are granted to the user.

Authentication object A MicroStrategy object that specifies both who the user is and the security context within which that user will interact with the system. An authentication object contains the security information required (such as user login ID and password) to make a connection or perform task execution.

Autostyle A set of predefined formatting settings that can be applied to a report in either Desktop or Web.

A document that stores formatting properties for various control types in a document.

Page 403: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 403

Axis A vector along which data is displayed. There are three axes-Row, Column, and Page. When a user defines a template for a report, he places template units-attributes, dimensions, metrics, consolidations, and custom groups-along each axis.

B

Banding A method of organizing values according to a set of descriptive or meaningful data ranges called buckets. For example, customers in the age ranges of 10-20, 21-30, and 31-40, where each set of ages is a band. Banding is also used for display purposes, where every other row is a different color and the two colors alternate.

Base table A fact table that stores data at the lowest level of dimensionality.

Boolean A logical value that is either TRUE or FALSE (sometimes implemented as 1 and 0, respectively).

Browse To scan for an element in a hierarchy. Generally, browsing implies viewing, rather than changing information.

Browse hierarchy A set of attributes defined by a user for a project. For example, Country, State and City could form a Geography hierarchy. Compare schema hierarchy.

Browse path A navigation path used for browsing metadata.

Business intelligence(BI) system

A system that facilitates the analysis of volumes of complex data by providing the ability to view data from multiple perspectives.

Page 404: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

404 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

C

Cache A special data store holding recently accessed information for quick future access. This is normally done for frequently requested reports, whose execution is faster because they need not run against the database. Results from the data warehouse are stored separately and can be used by new job requests that require the same data. In the MicroStrategy environment, when a user runs a report for the first time, the job is submitted to the database for processing. However, if the results of that report are cached, the results can be returned immediately without having to wait for the database to process the job the next time the report is run.

Cache hit An indicator determining whether a cache has been used by job execution or not.

Catalog A table that contains the names of all non-temporary tables in a data warehouse.

Child attribute The lower-level attribute in an attribute relationship.

Client The type of computer that users employ to access applications in one or more common server computers.

Clustering A configuration strategy that provides uninterrupted access to data, enhanced scalability, and increased performance for users.

Column A one-dimensional vertical array of values in a table.

The set of fields of a given name and datatype in all rows of a given table.

MicroStrategy object in the schema layer that can represent one or more physical table columns or no columns.

Compound attribute An attribute that has more than one key (ID) form.

Page 405: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 405

Compound join A way to join a document’s multiple datasets. It matches any common attributes, then creates a virtual dataset by sequentially proceeding through dataset rows to create a complete set of joined rows. A compound join saves memory space and processing time.

Compound key In a relational database, a primary key consisting of more than one database column.

Compound metric A metric that cannot have a level placed on the entire metric, although it can be set separately on each of the components.

Concurrent users Users that execute reports or use the system in one way or another at the same time.

Conditional metric A metric containing filter criteria in its definition.

Configuration object A MicroStrategy object appearing in the system layer and usable across multiple projects. Configuration objects include (among others) these object types: users, database instances, database logins, and schedules.

Connection mapping The process of mapping MicroStrategy users to database connections and database logins. For MicroStrategy users to execute reports, they must be mapped to a database connection and database login.

Consolidation An object that can be placed on a template and is made up of an ordered collection of elements called consolidation elements. Each element is a grouping of attribute elements that accommodates inter-row arithmetic operations.

Consolidation element A line item in a consolidation based on attribute elements. For example, Year=2005 / Year=2006.

Page 406: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

406 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Control Any item in the document's Layout area that you can select. This can be a text field, line, rectangle, image, or Grid/Graph object. These different kinds of controls are referred to as control types.

Control default A set of properties that can be set for each type of control and each section in a document. You can set the defaults according to the control that is currently selected; afterward, its format is applied to any object of the same type that you create in the document.

Cookie A piece of information that is sent to your Web browser-along with an HTML page-when you access a Web site or page. This information is usually used to remember details about what a user did on a particular site or page for the purpose of providing a more personal experience for the user.

Cross-tab (v.) To reconfigure a grid report by moving elements to different axes. Includes the pivot function.

Custom group An object that can be placed on a template and is made up of an ordered collection of elements called custom group elements. Each element contains its own set of filtering qualifications.

D

Data Explorer A portion of the interface used to browse through data contained in the warehouse. Users can navigate through hierarchies of attributes that are defined by the administrator to find the data they need.

Data mart A database, usually smaller than a data warehouse, designed to help managers make strategic decisions about their business by focusing on a specific subject or department.

A database instance used to store result sets saved to data mart tables.

Page 407: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 407

Data mart report A special kind of report that saves its report data in a database rather than returning those results to the user. Data mart reports either create a new table in the database to store the report data or append the report data into an existing table.

Data mart table A relational table that is used to store the report data from a data mart report.

Data mining The process of using the results of data exploration to adjust or enhance business strategies. It builds on the patterns, trends, and exceptions found through data exploration to support the business.

A technique using software tools geared for the user who typically does not know exactly what he is searching for, but is looking for particular patterns or trends. Data mining is the process of sifting through large amounts of data to produce data content relationships.

Data modeling A method used to define and analyze data requirements needed to support the business functions of an enterprise. These data requirements are recorded as a conceptual data model with associated data definitions. Data modeling defines the relationships between data elements and data structures.

Data repository A logical and sometimes physical partitioning of data in multiple databases that apply to specific applications or sets of applications. For example, several databases (revenues and expenses) that support financial applications (A/R, A/P) can reside in a single financial data repository.

Page 408: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

408 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Data source name(DSN)

Provides connectivity to a database through an ODBC driver. A DSN generally contains host machine name or IP address, instance name, database name, directory, database driver, User ID, password, and other information. The exact information included in the DSN varies by DBMS. Once you create a DSN for a particular database, you can use it in an application to call information from the database. There are three types of DSNs:

System DSN: can be used by anyone who has access to the machine. DSN info is stored in the registry

User DSN: is created for a specific user. Also stored in the registry

File DSN: DSN information is stored in a text file with.DSN extension.

Data warehouse A database, typically very large, containing the historical data of an enterprise. Used for decision support or business intelligence, it organizes data and allows coordinated updates and loads.

A copy of transaction data specifically structured for query, reporting, and analysis.

Database administrator One who manages a database. The database administrator determines the content, internal structure, and access strategy for a database, defines security and integrity, and monitors database performance.

Database connection Stores all data warehouse specific connection information such as DSN, driver mode and SQL execution mode as well as connection caching information.

Page 409: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 409

Database instance A MicroStrategy object created in MicroStrategy Desktop that represents a connection to the warehouse. A database instance specifies warehouse connection information, such as the data warehouse DSN, Login ID and password, and other data warehouse specific information.

Database server software running on a particular machine. Though it is technically possible to have more than one instance running on a machine, there is usually only one instance per machine.

Database login This stores the login ID and password that MicroStrategy Intelligence Server uses to connect to a particular database.

Database managementsystem

A collection of programs that enables you to store, modify, and extract information from a database.

Dataset An encapsulation of a multidimensional result set created when executing an MDX statement.

A MicroStrategy report that retrieves data from the data warehouse or cache. It is used to define the data available on a document.

Dataset Objects A panel in the Document Editor that shows all objects (grouped by datasets) that can be used in the document.

All objects that can be used in the document as supplied by the datasets. Dataset Objects are attributes, consolidations, custom groups, and metrics.

Date prompt A prompt for a date value. For example, prompt answered as "Date: 6/9/99".

Deciling The method by which a group is broken up into ten groups of equal elements. The first decile consists of the top ten percent; the second, the 11th to 20th percent; the third, the 21st to 30th percent; and so on.

Page 410: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

410 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Decision supportsystem

A set of software applications intended to allow users to search vast stores of information for specific reports that are critical for making management decisions. These applications also allow end users to create ad hoc queries.

Degradation A type of fact extension in which values at one level of aggregation are reported at a second, lower attribute level.

Derived attribute An attribute calculated from a mathematical operation on columns in a warehouse table. For example, Age can be calculated from the expression [Current Date-Birth Date].

Derived fact column A fact column created through a mathematical combination of other existing fact columns.

Derived metric A metric based on data already available in a report. It is calculated by the Intelligence Server, not in the database. Use a derived metric to perform column math, that is, calculations on other metrics, on report data after it has been returned from the database.

Derived table A result set referred to by an alias and defined by a nested SELECT statement in the FROM clause. The result set forms a table used by the outer SELECT statement. A nested select can use all part of a standard select statement (Select, From, Where, Group By and Having clauses).

Design view A mode of the report editor that lets a user modify a report's definition without having to execute the report.

Diagnostics The process of logging and analyzing the information on the operation performance by Intelligence Server.

Dimension An element or factor making up a complete entity or variable (a quantity that may assume any one of a set of values). For example, product types, times and regions are three dimensions pertaining to sales. Different product types are sold over different time zones in different regions.

Page 411: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 411

Distribution Manager(DM)

Delivery Engine object that receives service execution triggers, distributes service data to the execution engines for processing, designates failover execution engines, and tracks the status of other system components. If the primary distribution manager fails, one of the backup distribution managers becomes the primary and takes over processing where the failed component stopped.

Piece of software or component used to instantiate a distribution manager object.

Machine being used to instantiate the distribution manager object.

Document A container for objects representing data coming from one or more reports, as well as positioning and formatting information. A document is used to format data from multiple reports in a single display of presentation quality.

The MicroStrategy object that supports the functionality defined above.

Document element Piece of a document containing dynamic content that is generated when that document is executed as part of a service. Consists of at least one information object, plus error-handling instructions. May include an XSL stylesheet selection, depending on the type of information object chosen.

Document instance Facilitates the processing of the document through Intelligence Server (like a report instance is used for processing reports). It contains the report instances for all the child reports, the XML results for the child reports, and any prompt information that may be included in the child reports.

Document template Provides the structure and layout for a document. For example, an Excel document template includes the basic workbook structure, any predefined macros, and static worksheet content.

Page 412: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

412 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Drill A method of obtaining supplementary information after a report has been executed. The new data is retrieved by re-querying the Intelligent Cube or database at a different attribute or fact level.

A link from one document to another document, report, or HTML document. Prompt answers for the target can be included in the drill.

Dynamic aggregation Rollup of metric values that occurs when an attribute is moved from the report grid to the Report Objects. Whenever the attributes in the Report Objects are not the same as the attributes on the grid, dynamic aggregation has occurred. Dynamic aggregation happens on-the-fly, in memory.

Dynamic relationship When the relationship between elements of parent and child attributes changes. These changes often occur because of organizational restructuring; geographical realignment; or the addition, reclassification, or discontinuation of items or services. For example, a store may decide to reclassify the department to which items belong.

E

Editor A dialog used to create and edit MicroStrategy Objects. There is a Filter Editor, Template Editor, Attribute Editor, and a Metric Editor, Report Editor, and so on.

Element browsing The process of navigating through hierarchies of attribute elements. For example, viewing the list of months in a year.

Element cache Most-recently used lookup table elements that are stored in memory on the Intelligence Server or MicroStrategy Desktop machines so they can be retrieved more quickly.

Enterprise reporting Allows users to subscribe to reports, apply personalization criteria, and view the information through a central web-based interface as formatted HTML reports.

Page 413: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 413

Entity relationshipdiagram (ERD)

A diagram that provides a graphical representation of the physical structure of the data in the source system, which lets you easily recognize tables and columns and the data stored in those columns.

Entry level The lowest level set of attributes at which a fact is available for analysis.

Expression Formulas built from functions, attributes, facts, metrics, and consolidations that can be used to define attribute forms, fact calculations, metrics, or filters.

Extraction,transformation, and

loading (ETL)

The process used to populate a data warehouse from disparate existing database systems.

Third-party software used to facilitate such a process.

F

Fact A measurement value, often numeric and typically aggregatable, stored in a data warehouse.

A schema object representing a column in a data warehouse table and containing basic or aggregated numbers-usually prices, or sales in dollars, or inventory quantities in counts.

Fact column A column in a database table that contains fact data.

Fact extension A virtual table created at run time to extend the level of a fact from its original level to that required by the report. Defines how a fact that does not relate to all levels, relates to any unrelated levels.

Fact table A database table containing numeric data that may be aggregated along one or more dimensions. Fact tables may contain atomic or summarized data.

Page 414: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

414 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Failover support Ensures that a business intelligence system remains available for use in the event of an application or hardware failure. Clustering provides failover support in two ways: load distribution and request recovery.

Filter A MicroStrategy object that specifies a set of criteria used to limit the data returned in a report. Specifically, it limits the returned values of an attribute in the result set to a specified range. It is normally implemented in the SQL WHERE clause. Examples include: "2006", "All weekdays in May", "Stores in the Northeast".

Filter expression A expression combining OLAP objects with logical, and optionally, mathematical operators.

Folder A MicroStrategy object used for grouping and storing in a single place a set of objects that are similar, such as filters, templates, and reports.

Folder list A portion of the interface that lists all the folders found in the project in a hierarchical fashion. It helps a user to visualize and browse through a MicroStrategy project.

Form One of several columns that are different representations of the same thing, as ID, Name, Long Description, Abbreviation.

Four-tier In the context of MicroStrategy system configurations, a four-tier system consists of a Web browser client, the MicroStrategy Web Server, the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, and the database.

Function In a MicroStrategy project, the object created by the Import Functions utility, which allows a MicroStrategy report access to a function plug-in.

Function plug-in Allows user-defined functions to be used by the MicroStrategy Analytical Engine.

Page 415: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 415

G

Garbage Collection A form of memory management that attempts to reclaim garbage, or memory occupied by objects that are no longer in use.

Governor One of several parameters set by the administrator that collectively and under certain conditions prevent a job from executing or a user from making a connection.

Graph view Report viewing mode that displays results as a graphical chart.

Grid/Graph A control placed in a document that displays information in the same way a MicroStrategy report does.

Grid unit The individual attributes, metrics, consolidations, and custom groups that can be placed on a report grid.

Grid view Report viewing mode that displays result data in tabular form.

Group (short name for "user group") A collection of users, such as Everyone, System Administrators, LDAP users and so on. Groups provide a convenient way for managing a large number of users. You can assign privileges to groups as well as permissions to objects.

Grouping A way to create a hierarchical structure for a document.

GUID A 32-character string used to uniquely identify MicroStrategy objects.

Page 416: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

416 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

H

Heterogeneous columnnaming

Columns in different tables in a database that store the same data but have different names. For example, one column named Customer in one table and one named Customer Name in a different table, both containing customer names.

Hierarchy A set of attributes defining a meaningful path for element browsing or drilling. The order of the attributes is typically-though not always-defined such that a higher attribute has a one-to-many relationship with its child attributes.

History cache A report result saved for future reference via the History List by a specific user.

History List The portion of the interface that allows users to retrieve the results of previously executed or scheduled reports and HTML documents.

Homogeneous columnnaming

Columns in different tables of a database that contain the same data and have the same column name.

I

ID column A column that contains attribute element identification codes. All attributes must have an ID column.

Implicit attribute An attribute that does not physically exist in the database because it is created at the application level. Such an attribute has its expression defined as a constant value, though nothing is saved in a column. For example, you may wish to create columns in the database with a value of 1 for every row to get around COUNT limitations. You don not have to actually create the column, though, because in the Attribute Editor, you can just enter a "1" in the expression to create a count. Implicit attributes are useful in analyzing and

Page 417: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 417

retrieving information. When analyzing data, you can use constant attributes to create a COUNT to keep track of the number of rows returned. You can use constant attributes when building metrics, where you can sum the column holding the constant to create a COUNT. Any constant is acceptable.

inbox synchronization The process of synchronizing inboxes across all nodes in the cluster, so that all nodes contain the same History List messages.

Incremental fetch A feature that returns a large result set to the client in numerous small pieces. This ensures that network traffic and client processing is kept to a minimum.

Intelligent Cube A copy of the report data saved in memory and used for manipulation of the view definition. This division allows multiple reports with different views to share a common data definition.

.isc file A binary file format defined by arcplan inSight for storing connection information for data sources. The file identifies the project source, project, virtual cube, and other information required for connection. arcplan inSight connect (.isc) files are created by arcplan inSight and not by MDX Adapter Connection String Generator.

J

Job An instance of a report or an HTML document execution in the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server.

Job priority Defines the order in which jobs are processed.

Join A SQL operation that combines data from multiple tables into a single result table.

Page 418: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

418 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Joint children Joint child relationships are another type of many-to-many relationship where one attribute has a many-to-many relationship to two otherwise unrelated attributes. These relationships can be modeled and conceptualized like traditional attributes, but like facts, they exist at the intersection of multiple attribute levels. For example, consider the relationship between three attributes: promotion, item, and quarter. In this case, promotion has a many-to-many relationship to both item and quarter. An example of a promotion might be a "Red Sale" where all red items are on sale. A business might run this promotion around Valentine's Day (Q1) and again at Christmas time (Q4).

K

Key PerformanceIndicator (KPI)

An indicator gauging how well a company progresses in numerous areas such as finance, customer service, and product availability and distribution.

L

Layout area The middle panel of the Document Editor in which you place data or other controls to determine the appearance of the document when it is viewed as a PDF.

Level In a data warehouse, facts are said to be stored at a particular level defined by the attribute IDs present in the fact table. For example, if a fact table has a Date column, an Item_ID column, and a fact column, that fact is stored at the Date/Item level.

With regard to metric calculation, the level is the level of calculation for the metric. For example, a metric on a report with Year and Store attributes would be calculated at the Year/Store level. See also level of aggregation.

Page 419: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 419

Level of aggregation The point in an attribute hierarchy where aggregation is performed. For example, in the geographical State-City-Store hierarchy there are three possible levels of aggregation.

Load balancing A strategy aimed at achieving even distribution of MicroStrategy Web user sessions across MicroStrategy Intelligence Servers. MicroStrategy achieves four-tier load balancing by incorporating load balancers into MicroStrategy Web.

Lock schema An application designer can lock the schema while making changes to the schema to ensure that no other users are making changes at the same time.

Locked hierarchy A hierarchy that has at least one attribute that may not be browsed by end users. Application Designers typically lock hierarchies if there are so many attribute elements that element browsing is not usable.

Log A file that traces and records events that occur in the MicroStrategy environment. Primarily used for troubleshooting.

Logical data model An graphical representation of data that is arranged logically for the general user, as opposed to the physical data model or warehouse schema, which arranges data for efficient database use.

Login A procedure that establishes a session with an online application.

Login ID A text string usually entered along with a password during login; sometimes called a user name.

Page 420: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

420 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Lookup table A database table used to uniquely identify attribute elements. They typically consist of descriptions of dimensions. Lookup tables are usually joined to fact tables to group the numeric facts in the fact table by dimensional attributes in the lookup tables.

M

Many-to-manyrelationship

An attribute relationship in which multiple elements of a parent attribute can relate to multiple elements of a child attribute, and vice versa. See also relationship, one-to-many, many-to-one.

Many-to-onerelationship

An attribute relationship in which

(1) multiple elements of a parent attribute relate to only one element of a child attribute, and

(2) every element of the child attribute can relate to multiple elements of the parent.

Market basket analysis The study of which products often sell together in a transaction.

Matching cache Report results retained for the purpose of being reused by the same report requests later on.

Matching-history cache A Matching cache with at least one History List message referencing it.

MDX cache MDX Adapter can save query results in memory so if the same report is run again MDX Adapter will get the results from memory instead of running the query against the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server again.

Page 421: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 421

Member cache MicroStrategy reports containing all members for a level of an ODBO hierarchy. When MDX Adapter metadata is loaded, members are retrieved from the saved reports rather than from the database.

Metadata A repository whose data associates the tables and columns of a data warehouse with user-defined attributes and facts to enable the mapping of the business view, terms, and needs to the underlying database structure. Metadata can reside on the same server as the data warehouse or on a different database server. It can even be held in a different RDBMS.

Metadata partitionmapping

A type of application-level partitioning where the mapping of partitions is carried out and maintained in the project metadata.

Metric A business calculation defined by an expression built with functions, facts, attributes, or other metrics. For example: sum(dollar_sales) or [Sales] - [Cost]

MicroStrategyAnalytics Modules

A group of MicroStrategy projects with prepackaged metadata, reports, scorecards, and dashboards; default physical and logical data models to allow the modules work with an external physical schema and data model or with the module's packaged data warehouse schema; and reference guides for each Analysis Module's data model, the individual analysis areas, metadata object definitions, data dictionary, and individual report use scenarios.

MicroStrategyBusiness Intelligence

Developer Kit

A rapid application development framework consisting of analytical starter kits (the Analytics Modules), development products, and design and development methodologies. The BIDK includes Analytics Modules that are built to be portable.

MicroStrategyEnterprise Manager

Part of MicroStrategy Administrator used to monitor activity across all servers and projects.

Page 422: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

422 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

MicroStrategyIntelligence Server

Core of the MicroStrategy architecture, MicroStrategy Intelligence Server manages and organizes users, projects, and database connections; coordinates, prioritizes, and executes all user requests; and allocates the resources necessary to complete them. It tracks schedules, manages security, and provides the ability to monitor and analyze the daily activity of the entire decision support environment.

MicroStrategy MDXAdapter

Software package that allows users of other business intelligence interfaces to access the analytical power and scalability of the MicroStrategy 7i Platform. With MicroStrategy MDX Adapter, users of Microsoft Excel, Alphablox, arcplan inSight, Brio, Business Objects, Cognos PowerPlay, Crystal Reports, and other OLE DB for OLAP consumers can connect through MicroStrategy Intelligence Server and access any major relational database. MicroStrategy MDX Adapter offers built-in support for the OLE DB for OLAP (ODBO) application programming interface (API). This support enables ODBO consumers and ActiveX Data Object Multidimensional (ADO MD) custom applications to access data through MicroStrategy Intelligence Server.

MicroStrategy object The objects available in MicroStrategy applications, such as reports, HTML documents, filters, metrics, attributes, and so on.

MicroStrategy Tutorial A sample MicroStrategy project that models a fictitious company. It is used throughout the MicroStrategy user documentation to illustrate concepts, features, and procedures associated with the use of the MicroStrategy platform and to serve as a business example.

Moderately normalizedschema

Schema type having the same basic structure as the highly normalized schema, but here the higher-level attribute ID columns are present within all related tables.

MOLAP Multidimensional online analytical processing.

Page 423: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 423

My Personal Folder A file folder available only to an authorized individual as a private folder for saving objects.

N

Node Each machine in a cluster.

Nonaggregatablemetric

A metric that is not additive along all dimensions. For example, "Stock On Hand at End of Week" is not additive across time: the stock on hand at the end of the week is not the sum of the stock on hand at end of each day in the week.

O

Object Conceptually, an object is the highest grouping level of information about one concept, used by the user to achieve the goal of specified data analysis. More concretely, an object is any item that can be selected and manipulated, including folders, reports, facts, metrics, and so on.

Object Browser Enables navigation through a MicroStrategy project for the purpose of selecting objects. For example, in the report editor the Object Browser is used to select objects, like Attributes or Metrics, that will be included in the report's definition.

Object cache A recently used object definition stored in memory on MicroStrategy Desktop and MicroStrategy Intelligence Server.

Object Server Component of MicroStrategy Intelligence Server that deals with creating, accessing, and deleting MicroStrategy objects.

Object template Prebuilt guidelines for creating application objects such as reports, filters, and templates.

Page 424: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

424 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

ODBC driver A software routine that translates MicroStrategy Intelligence Server requests into commands that the DBMS understands.

One-to-manyrelationship

An attribute relationship in which every element of a parent attribute can relate to multiple elements of a child attribute, while every element of the child attribute relates to only one element of the parent. The one-to-many attribute relationship is the most common in data models.

One-to-one relationship An attribute relationship in which every element of the parent attribute relates to exactly one element of the child attribute, and vice versa.

Online AnalyticalProcessing (OLAP)

In general, a system with analytical processing that involves activities such as manipulating transaction records to calculate sales trends, growth patterns, percent to total contributions, trend reporting, and profit analysis.

Specifically for MDX Adapter, a technology that uses multidimensional structures such as virtual cubes for fast access to data for the purpose of data analysis. Typically, data warehouses such as the sample MicroStrategy Tutorial project store the source data for OLAP.

Online transactionprocessing (OLTP)

Typically, databases or mainframes that store transactional data. Transactional processing involves the simple recording of transactions such as sales, inventory, withdrawals, or deposits.

Open DatabaseConnectivity

An open standard with which client computers can communicate with relational database servers. Client machines make a connection to a particular logical database, on a particular physical database server, using a particular ODBC driver.

Outline mode Report viewing mode that creates indented, collapsible groupings of related elements to make reports neater and easier to read.

Page 425: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 425

P

Page-by Segmenting the data in a grid report by placing available attributes, consolidations, and metrics on a third axis called the Page axis. Since a grid is two-dimensional, only a slice of the cube can be seen at any one time. The slice is characterized by the choice of elements on the Page axis. By varying the selection of elements, the user can page through the cube.

Panel stack A container for a group of panels. It stores the properties that control a group of panels.

Parameter With respect to function plug-ins, allows access to data.

Parent attribute The higher-level attribute in an attribute relationship with one or more children.

Parent dependency Occurs when an object is used as part of the definition of other objects.

Partial relationship An attribute relationship in which elements of one attribute relate to elements of a second attribute, while the opposite is not necessarily true.

Partition base table A warehouse table that contains one part of a larger set of data. Partition tables are usually divided along logical lines, such as time or geography. Also referred to as a PBT. See also partition mapping.

Partition mapping The division of large logical tables into smaller physical tables based on a definable data level, such as month or department. Partitions minimize the number of tables and records within a table that must be read to satisfy queries issued against the warehouse. By distributing usage across multiple tables, partitions improve the speed and efficiency of database queries.

Page 426: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

426 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Partition mapping table A warehouse table that contains information used to identify the partitioned base tables as part of a logical whole. Also referred to as a PMT. See also partition base table and partition mapping.

Password Preserves user account integrity in an application. Many applications can associate both a password and a password hint with each user.

Permissions Define for objects the degree of control users have over them.

Personalized pageexecution

Executes one multi-page report for all users in a segment and then uses this single report to provide personalized content (pages) for different users. All users have their reports executed under the context of the same Intelligence Server user, so individual security profiles are not maintained. However, load on the Intelligence Server may be significantly lower than for PRE in some cases.

Personalized reportexecution

Executes a separate report for each set of users with unique personalization. Users may have reports executed under the context of the corresponding Intelligence Server user if desired. Using this option, security profiles defined in MicroStrategy Desktop are maintained. However if there are many users who all have unique personalization, this option can place a large load on Intelligence Server.

Physical warehouseschema

A detailed graphic representation of your business data as it is stored in the data warehouse. It organizes the logical data model in a method that makes sense from a database perspective.

Pivot To reconfigure data on a grid report by placing report objects (attributes, metrics, consolidations) on different axes. Also, to reconfigure a grid report by interchanging row and column headers, and hence the associated data. Subset of cross-tab.

Page 427: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 427

Plugin An application that can easily be installed and executed by the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server in one of several identical interfaces. For example, advanced statistical and financial functions can be added as additional processing components.

Port number The port number is how a server process identifies itself on the machine on which it is running. For example, when the Intelligence Server machine receives a network call from a client (Desktop, Web, Narrowcast Server, Command Manager, and so on), it knows to forward those calls to the Intelligence Server port number that is specified in the call.

Portability The ability of an analytical application to be integrated into an existing or external data warehouse. To port a given Analysis Module, you "rewire" the module to the physical schema of an existing data warehouse.

Pre-aggregation Aggregation, or the calculation of numeric data at a specific attribute level, that is completed before reports are run, with the results stored in an aggregate table.

Prefix A prefix is stored in the project metadata associated with a table or tables and is used by the Engine to generate SQL. Also, the Catalog Server uses it to obtain table sample values and row counts. In most cases, it should match the name space field since it is used to qualify on a specific table belonging to a certain owner or name space. Prefixes can be defined and modified from the Warehouse Catalog interface.

Primary dataset The dataset used to define the grouping and sorting of a document. Although a document can contain multiple datasets, only objects from the primary dataset can be used to group and sort the document.

Primary key In a relational database, the set of columns required to uniquely identify a record in a table.

Page 428: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

428 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Privilege Defines what types of operations certain users and user groups can perform in the MicroStrategy system. For example, which objects a given user can create and which applications and editors he can use.

Process An executing application comprising one or more threads. Processes use temporary private address spaces and control operating system resources such as files, dynamic memory allocations, pipes, and synchronization objects.

Processing unit MicroStrategy Intelligence Server component that coordinates the execution of tasks. A processing unit allocates the thread resources that the server uses to execute tasks.

Project The MicroStrategy object in which you define all of the schema and application objects, which together provide for a flexible reporting environment. A project is the highest-level intersection of a data warehouse, metadata repository, and user community, containing reports, filters, metrics, and functions.

An object containing the definition of a project, as defined in (1). The project object is specified when requesting the establishment of a session.

Project designer The user category of one who creates projects and all of the schema objects (facts, attributes, hierarchies) for a project. A project designer is thoroughly familiar with the data model and schema object editors and wizards.

Project Merge Wizard A wizard that assists in merging two MicroStrategy projects.

Project source Defines a connection to the metadata database and is used by various MicroStrategy products to access projects. A direct project source is a two-tier connection directly to a metadata repository. A server project source is a three-tier connection to a MicroStrategy Intelligence Server. One project source can contain many projects and the administration tools found at the project source level are used to monitor and administer all projects in the project source.

Page 429: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 429

Prompt (n.) MicroStrategy object in the report definition that is incomplete by design. The user is asked during the resolution phase of report execution to provide an answer that completes the information. A typical example with a filter is choosing a specific attribute on which to qualify.

In general, a window requesting user input, as in "type login ID and password at the prompt."

Prompt styles The subscriber has the choice of six prompt style selections: (i) List box, a single filter; (ii) List box, multiple filters; (iii) Radio button, single selection; (iv) Check box, multiple selection; (v) Shopping cart with operator; and (vi) Shopping cart.

Prompt types The subscriber has the choice of three prompt type selections: (i) Filter selection is from either a single filter or a combination of filters that combine with a variety of prompt styles; (ii) Attribute element selection has a single find page style that searches for an element in a dimension; and (iii) Metric Qualification has a single prompt style that qualifies metrics from a folder selection.

Property List The list of settings used to specify the appearance or any other characteristic of a control on a document.

Public Folder Available to all users with access to the application.

Q

Query A request for data from a database or data warehouse. A report is a database query.

Query Engine The MicroStrategy Server component responsible for submitting SQL code to the database.

Page 430: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

430 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

R

Ranking A type of OLAP function that returns the rank of a value in a group of values. Rows with equal values with respect to the ordering are assigned the same rank.

Ratio The relationship in quantity, amount, or size between the cardinalities of related attributes.

Reference document In BIDK, a document that is related to the one in question, but which was created earlier. For example, a sales order usually originates from a quotation; the quotation is the reference document for the sales order. A quotation often originates from an inquiry; the inquiry is the reference document for the quotation.

Refresh To update the client-side object instance such as the report being viewed from the repository or cache or database (because it is either dirty or out-of-date).

Relate table A table containing the ID columns of two or more attributes, thus defining associations between them.

Relational databasemanagement system

A collection of programs that enables you to store, modify, and extract information from a database.

Relationship An association specifying the nature of the connection between one attribute (the parent) and one or more other attributes (the children). For example, City is a child attribute of State.

Report The central focus of any decision support investigation, a report allows users to query for data, analyze that data and then present it in a visually pleasing manner.

Report cache A result set from an executed report that is stored on MicroStrategy Intelligence Server.

Page 431: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 431

Report Editor Application that allows users to create a report and set its properties—identical to Report Wizard, except that it may be only one dialog instead of a series of prompts and modal dialog boxes.

Report Filter Restricts the report data that is currently being viewed. It may include conditions based on any of the report objects.

Report instance A container for all objects and information needed and produced during report execution including templates, filters, prompt answers, generated SQL, report results, and so on. It is the only object that is referenced when executing a report, being passed from one special server to another as execution progresses.

Report Objects A portion of the interface that displays all of the objects that are associated with a report. It is a palette that users can work from to select the report objects, and consequently the report data, that they would like to view. When working within the set of report objects users can expect fast response times and a high level of interactivity.

Report wizard An object template for reports that allows users to create reports by selecting a template and a filter.

Role Exists when one entity within a model serves multiple purposes. In a schema model, attribute State can have the roles of Supplier State and Customer State.

In a security model, a role is the set of permissions or privileges that any given user can have over an object or an application.

Row The horizontal axis of a report

Page 432: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

432 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

S

Save To store an item in the metadata.

Scalar A single value, derived from one or more values.

Scheduling A feature of the MicroStrategy Intelligence Server that is used to automate specific tasks.

Schema The set of tables in a data warehouse associated with a logical data model. The attribute and fact columns in those tables are considered part of the schema itself.

The layout or structure of a database system. In relational databases, the schema defines the tables, the fields in each table, and the relationships between fields and tables.

Schema object MicroStrategy object created, usually by a project designer, that relates the information in the logical data model and physical warehouse schema to the MicroStrategy environment. These objects are developed in MicroStrategy Architect, which can be accessed from MicroStrategy Desktop. Schema objects directly reflect the warehouse structure and include attributes, facts, functions, hierarchies, operators, partition mappings, tables, and transformations.

Scorecard A type of tally sheet displaying a company's performance using key performance indicators (KPIs) that gauge how well a company progresses in areas such as finance, customer service, product availability and distribution

Security Data and system protection from corruption and loss. Especially on systems accessed by many users, the prevention or restriction of access to selected elements by unauthorized individuals.

Security filter A qualification associated with a user or user group that is applied to all queries executed by that user or group.

Page 433: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 433

Security role A MicroStrategy object that is used to store a particular grouping of privileges that you can apply to users or groups from project to project.

Security view A feature of most relational databases that restricts a user's access to the data so he can view only a subset of it.

Selector objects that provide dashboards with interactivity, enabling users to select the data they prefer to see.

Server In a client/server computing environment, the server receives and processes all requests that come from the client.

Server definition An instance of MicroStrategy Intelligence Server and all of its configuration settings.

A MicroStrategy object stored in the metadata containing information about the configuration of an Intelligence Server.

Server instance The combination of an Intelligence Server running with a particular server definition.

Server object A configuration-level object in the metadata called server definition. It contains governing settings that apply at the server level, a list of projects registered on the server, connection information to the metadata repository, and so on.

Service A mode of operation for applications running on Windows. Services can be configured to start automatically when the machine where they are located starts. A user is not required to be logged on for a service to run. To set up an application as a service, you must be the Windows administrator.

Page 434: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

434 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Session In general, the time during which a program is running. In most interactive programs, a session is the time during which the program accepts inputs and processes information.

In the context of MicroStrategy Intelligence Server, a session is a connection from a client to the Intelligence Server. Properties of a session include project source, project, user name, password, and authentication mode.

An interactive client/server computing facility in which a program in a server accepts inputs from a client and processes information in behalf of an end user. Before the session begins, a connection must be established between client and server. A session is active when the programs are running.

Session pool A collection of MicroStrategy Intelligence Server sessions that the server shares with MDX Adapter. An MDX Adapter session is identical to one in the pool if the MicroStrategy project source name, project name, user name, password, and MDX Adapter virtual cube name are all the same.

Shortcut Bar Used in conjunction with the Object Browser as a means for fast navigation. Users can drag any folder to the shortcut bar to create a fast link (shortcut) to that folder. When the user then clicks on the folder icon the Object Browser will automatically return to that folder without additional navigation.

Shortcut metric A metric based on metrics already included in a report. They provide a quick way to add new metrics to that report. Shortcut metrics belong to one of these types: percent-to-total metrics, transformation metrics, rank metrics, and running sum metrics.

Simple key In a relational database, a primary key that requires only one column to uniquely identify a record within a table.

Page 435: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 435

Simple metric A type of metric that can stand alone or be used as a building block for compound metrics. Simple metrics always contain at least one aggregate function, such as sum or average, applied to a fact, attribute, or another metric. The entire metric can only contain one level.

Smart metric A property of a compound metric that allows you to change the default evaluation order. Smart metrics calculate subtotals on the individual elements of the compound metric. For example, a smart metric uses the formula Sum(Metric1)/Sum(Metric2) rather than Sum(Metric1/Metric2) when calculating subtotals on a report.

Software DevelopmentKit

A distribution package of application program development software and the instructions for its use.

Sort Arranging data according to some characteristic of the data itself (alphabetical descending, numeric ascending, and so forth).

Source system Any system or file that captures or holds data of interest.

SQL Engine The MicroStrategy Intelligence Server component that in report execution converts report requests into SQL to be used for a database query.

SQL view Report viewing mode that displays the SQL query used to produce results.

Statistics tables Tables that are used to record a variety of statistical information about the usage and performance of a MicroStrategy system.

Structured QueryLanguage

The standardized query language standardized in 1986 by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and used to request information from tables in a relational database and to manipulate the tables' structure and data.

Page 436: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

436 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Subscribe In Web, the ability to request a report or an HTML document execution to occur on a selected predefined schedule. Reports and HTML documents scheduled through subscription are available in the History List when execution is complete.

Subtotal A totaling operation performed for a portion of a result set.

System hierarchy The superset hierarchy containing all attributes in a project. Unlike a browse hierarchy, it is not explicitly created but is automatically deduced by the MicroStrategy platform from all information available to it.

System tables The table or set of tables which contains the names of, and information about, all non-temporary tables in a data warehouse.

T

Table The primary physical component of a data warehouse, logically consisting of columns of data of varying types.

Table name space A field that is read from the warehouse catalog and used to organize databases. This field cannot be modified from the product since it is actually stored in the warehouse. Each table object in the metadata stores the name space or owner from which it came. This is needed to uniquely identify each table saved in the project when comparing table information in the metadata to the real one in the warehouse.

Table size The estimated size of a database table in terms of number of rows.

Task The smallest logical unit of work that MicroStrategy Intelligence Server performs when processing a job. Some tasks involved in processing a report include report resolution, SQL generation, SQL execution, data arrangement, and statistical analysis of the data.

Page 437: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 437

Template The data definition portion of the template consists of the group of objects (attribute, metrics, custom groups, etc.) that defines the columns of data to be included in the result set. The layout and format of these objects are defined within the template's view definition.

Template unit Anything that can be put on a template. Also, an item that can appear in a template, such as attribute, metric, dimension, custom group.

Temporary table A physical data table that is created in the warehouse, stores intermediate results sets, and allows query processing to occur within the warehouse. The table is removed after query processing completes.

Text field A type of control in a document that displays text in the document. These different types of text content are:

static text, which does not change and serves as a label

dynamic text, which is populated by the document or dataset. There are two types of dynamic text:

data field, which is populated from a dataset with data that originated in the data warehouse (or an Intelligence Server cache). A data field is only a reference to an object on a report.

auto text code, which is populated by the document or dataset, consisting of their properties rather than data from the data warehouse

Thread The execution of a sequence of CPU instructions that exist in a process. The basic unit of execution to which Windows allocates CPU time. Each thread in a process is associated with a set of CPU registers and a stack. A thread can be the execution of any part of the code, including a part currently associated with a different thread. All threads of a process share the virtual address space, global variables, and operating system resources of the process.

Page 438: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

438 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Three-tier A client/server architecture in which software systems are structured into three layers: the user interface layer, the business logic layer, and the database layer.

In the context of MicroStrategy system configurations, a three-tier system consists of a Desktop client, the Intelligence Server, and the database.

Threshold Used to create conditional formatting for metric values. For example, if dollar sales is greater than $200, format that cell to have a blue background with bold type.

Transformation A schema object that encapsulates a business rule used to compare results of different time periods. Transformations are used in the definition of a metric to alter the behavior of that metric.

Transformation metric An otherwise simple metric that takes the properties of the transformation applied to it. For example, a metric calculates total sales. Add a transformation for last year and the metric now calculates last year's total sales.

Two-tier A client/server architecture in which software systems are structured into two layers: the user interface/business logic layer and the database layer. Fourth-generation languages like 4GL have helped to popularize the two-tier client/server architecture.

in the context of MicroStrategy system configurations, a two-tier system consists of a Desktop client and the database. Compare three-tier, four-tier.

Page 439: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 439

U

User In general, an individual who uses a computer system, application, or resources. This person is usually associated with a user account.

A person who can log in to a MicroStrategy system, create and own objects such as reports, execute reports, and take advantage of all the other features in the system.

User account In a multi-user computer system, an established means for an individual to gain access to the system and its resources. Usually created by the system administrator, a user account consists of information about the user, such as password, rights, and permissions.

User address space Sometimes referred to as virtual address space. Independent of virtual memory and of finite size. It is measured per process on the machine (such as the MSTRSVR.exe Intelligence Server application). By definition, in a 32 bit operating system, virtual bytes is limited to 4GB (232). By default, Windows operating system divides this into two parts UAS and System Address Space (SAS). The UAS is, in this case, for Intelligence Server to store data and code while the SAS is for the operating system's use.

User category A classification of users of software. Generally speaking, MicroStrategy has the following user categories: administrator, application administrator, analyst, developer, project designer, report designer, service designer, subscription administrator, system administrator, system developer.

User group "Group" for short. A collection of users.

User hierarchy Named sets of attributes and their relationships, arranged in specific sequences for a logical business organization. They are user-defined and do not need to follow the logical model.

Page 440: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

440 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

User Merge Wizard provides an intuitive and efficient way to merge users, groups and other configuration objects into a MicroStrategy project source, reducing administrative efforts.

User name Login identifier, usually supplied with a password.

V

Vector An array of values.

View In a database, an entity that behaves exactly like a table but has no independent existence of its own.

In security terms, the complete set of permissions that a particular user or group of users has.

View definition Report execution steps which represent how the data is viewed and manipulated in the Intelligence Server. The view definition determines how the final report data set generated in the data definition steps is manipulated.

View filter The set of criteria that restricts the report data that is currently being viewed. It may include conditions based on any of the report objects.

Virtual bytes The limit associated with Intelligence Server's virtual address space allocation is the committed address space (memory actually being used by a process) plus the reserved address space (memory reserved for potential use by a process).

Virtual dataset A dataset held in memory that is the result of a compound join between multiple datasets in a document.

Virtual memory The amount of physical memory (RAM) plus Disk Page file (also called the swap file).

Page 441: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials MicroStrategy Glossary

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 441

VLDB Very large database.

VLDB settings Settings that affect the way MicroStrategy Intelligence Server interacts with the data warehouse to take advantage of the unique optimizations that different databases offer.

W - Z

Warehouse catalog The list of tables and columns that exist in the relational database.

Warehouse partitionmapping

A type of application-level partitioning where the mapping of partitions is carried out and maintained in the warehouse. MicroStrategy uses a partition mapping table (PMT), which lists the partition base tables (PBT) and relationships of the smaller tables to the original table.

Working set A collection of messages that reference in-memory report instances. A message is added to the working set when a user executes a report or retrieves a message from his or her Inbox.

XML cache A report cache in XML format that is created and available for use on the Web.

XSL Short for Extensible Style Language. While you use XML to define the structure of information, you use XSL to define the format of the information. XSL works much like a template, allowing you to apply single style HTML documents to multiple pages.

Page 442: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Glossary MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

442 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Page 443: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 443

INDEX

Aadministration

Database Instance Manager 42

Schedule Manager 42

User Manager 42

advanced sort 120

analytical processing defined on 23

Architect 32

attribute 65

Bbanding defined on 155

Ccache 292

change journaling 75

compound metric defined on 255

consolidation 65

cross-tab 64, defined on 64

Cube Analysis, Derived Elements, Report Objects, View Filter, Derived Metric 291

custom group 66

Ddata pivoting 110

methods for data pivoting 110

data warehouse defined on 23

Database Instance Manager 42

date qualification defined on 225

decision support defined on 21

decision support architecture

diagram 21, 27

ETL process 24, 27

metadata database 25, 27

MicroStrategy applications 25, 27

source systems 22, 27

default prompt answers 322

derived metricbuilt-in 301

derived metrics 299

DesktopAnalyst 33

Designer 33

menu 47

toolbar 48

Desktop, business intelligence 32

document subscription

Page 444: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Index MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

444 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

subscribinghistory list 134mobile device 137update cache 136

drill defined on 97

drilling 97

keep parent 102

Keep parent option 102

methods 99

toolbar button 100

dynamic aggregation 258

Eeditors

Filter Editor 219

Metric Editor 257

Report Editor 61

Search Editor 358

ETL process 24, 27

exporting 131, 212

FFact Editor 248

facts defined on 247

filter 59, defined on 215, defined on 243

shortcut defined on 227

Filter Editor defined on 219

layout 219

filters

attribute qualification filters 222

creating 220

embedded filters 229

filter definition prompts 323, 381

Filter Editor 219

filter qualifiers 229

set operators 230, 244, 296

folder list 44

foldersData Explorer 43

History 43

My Personal Objects 43

Public Objects 43

Schema Objects 43

Function Wizard 259

Ggrand totals 113

graph defined on 161

categories, graphseries defined on 165

data labels defined on 161

nested labels defined on 167

properties defined on 161

title defined on 163

undo/redo defined on 169

graphs

categories and series 166

displaying data values 161

formatting numbers 162

formatting the title 164

Hhistory list subscription 134

Llesson objectives

Filters 214

Introduction to MicroStrategy Decision Support 20

Introduction to MicroStrategy Desktop 30

Metrics 246

Prompts and Searches 316

Report Manipulations 94, 290

Page 445: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Index

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 445

Reports 58

locking columns and rows, resizing col-umns and rows defined on 158

Mmenus

Administration 47

Edit 47

File 47

Go 47

Help 47

Schema 47

Tools 47

View 47

Window 47

metadata database 25, 27

metric 66, defined on 247

removing columns 75

Metric Editor 257

layout 257

metrics 249

components 260

compound 255

compound metrics 255, 286

conditionality 261

create 261

creating 261

creation 257

formatting 264, 265

formula 260

level 261filtering 261grouping 261target 261

Metric Editor 257

nested 254

saving 263

simple 253

simple metrics 253, 299

subtotals and 265, 287

subtotals, subtotals 265

transformation 261

types 253

MicroStrategy

Architect 36

MicroStrategy Administrator 31

MicroStrategy Agent 31, 55

MicroStrategy Architect 31, 36

MicroStrategy Desktop

components 31

menu bar 47

toolbar buttons 48

MicroStrategy Intelligence Server 42

mobile device subscription 137

Nnested metric defined on 254

notes 139

OObject prompts 338

object viewer 44

objects

creation 48, 50

list of 51

save 52

saving 52, 71

schema, objectsapplication, objects

configuration 51

OLAP Services 291

outline mode defined on 125

using outline mode 126

Page 446: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Index MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

446 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Ppage-by defined on 106, 106

creating page-by fields 108

pivot defined on 110, defined on 211

printing 129, 211

project defined on 43, defined on 55

project source defined on 40

Project Source, project 39

project sourceslogging in 41

projects

accessing 43

default structure 43

prompt defined on 317

object 66

prompts 317

creating 318

filter definition 318, 323

filter definition prompts 323, 381

level 319

local, local prompts 349

object 318, 338

object prompt 318, 339, 381

required answers 321

save and reuse answers 321, 353

saving reports with 352, 381

search-based 361

types of 318

value prompt 319, 345, 381

web options 320

Qquick sort 119

Rremoving metric column 75

report defined on 59

shortcut defined on 227

report design

change journaling 75

removing metric column 75

report details properties 75filter details - contents 77filter details - other 78general 76template details 79

report details properties 75

Report Editor 62, 299

layout 61

report filter 67, defined on 215

types defined on 222

report manipulation

adding notes 139

save and reuse prompt answers 353

Report Objects 292

report viewsDesign View 74, 91

Graph View 74, 91

Grid View 74, 91

SQL View 74, 91

reports 59

adding attributes 68

adding metrics 68

create 64, 67

create, reportsview, reports

save 61

creating 67

details properties 75

display views 74, 91

exporting 131, 212

printing 129, 211

prompts and 352, 381

Report Editor 61

run 73

Page 447: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials Index

© 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc. 447

running 73

save 71

saving 71

view 60

reports, template 59

re-prompting 351

Ssave and reuse prompt answers 353

Schedule Manager 42

search defined on 358, defined on 381

by object ID 360

Search Editor 358

searches 358

prompts and 361

saving 361

Search Editor 358

set operator defined on 230

set operators 230, 244, 296

set qualification defined on 226

shortcut 53

shortcut bar 45

shortcut metrics 301

simple metric defined on 253, defined on 286, defined on 299

smart metrics 269

sort defined on 119, defined on 211

sorting 119

advanced sort 119

quick sort 119

source systems 22, 27

subtotal 112

subtotals

displaying 112

grand totals 113

Ttabular 65, defined on 65

template 64, defined on 64

Template Editor 64

templates

adding attributes 68

adding metrics 68

cross-tab 64

defining 64

tabular 65

Template Editor 64

threshold 148, 212

toolbar buttons

Copy 48

Cut 48

Delete 48

Display Outline Results 126

Drill 100

Edit 48

Go one level up 49

Go to project 49

New 48

Paste 48

Preferences/View Object Properties 48

Print Preview 129

Refresh 49

Rename 48

Run Report 49, 74

Search 48

Show or Hide the Folder List 49

View 49

View Pages 108

total defined on 112

transaction processing defined on 22, defined on 27

Page 448: MICROSTRATEGY DESKTOP: REPORTING · PDF fileApplication Development, MicroStrategy Intelligent Cubes, The Foundation For Intelligent E-Business, The Integrated Business Intelligence

Index MicroStrategy Desktop: Reporting Essentials

448 © 2011 MicroStrategy, Inc.

Uupdate cache subscription 136

User Manager 42

Vvalue prompts, prompts

value 344

view filter defined on 217, 296